JP2019208781A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine can output music in a variation performance having a variable display of a special drawing pattern. The game machine can carry out a first performance and a second performance during the variation performance. When the game machine carries out the first performance and the second performance in the variation performance, the game machine continuously outputs the music during the first performance. It is thus possible to proceed the performance according to the stream of the music. On the other hand, the game machine stops the BGM in the second performance. It is thus possible to emphasize the second performance and attract the attention on the second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to perform a special game based on establishment of a start condition.

  Conventionally, when a game ball wins at the start opening, various effects are performed based on the determination result of whether or not to play a special game, and there is a gaming machine that outputs, for example, music during the performance (for example, patents) Reference 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-96091

  However, when sound is output during the performance, there is room for improvement in order to improve interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention, when a start condition is satisfied, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a special game by stopping after changing the symbol A design control means for informing the result of the determination; an output means for outputting a sound; and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means has a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Can be executed, the second effect can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed, and during the first effect The reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first effect can be continued, and the output of the sound output before the execution of the second effect is stopped during the second effect.

  According to the present invention, interest can be improved using sound.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 Schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the attitude | position aspect of the production lever 28 The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by the game control part 100 Detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. The flowchart which shows the detail of the jackpot determination process of step S407 of FIG. The flowchart which shows the detail of the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S408 of FIG. FIG. 9 is a detailed flowchart showing the stop process in step S416. Detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing of step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special winning opening process of step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the gaming state setting processing of step S620 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the jackpot symbol which is selected according to the winning to each starting opening, the figure which shows the contents of the jackpot game which corresponds to each symbol A table showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and used for selecting a jackpot variation pattern Reach fluctuation used to select a reach fluctuation pattern when the special symbol judgment result is lost and it is judged that a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more is selected using a reach random number. The figure which shows an example of a pattern table This table is used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is losing and the fluctuation time of the predetermined time or longer is not selected using the reach random number, and is used for selecting the losing fluctuation pattern. The figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table The figure which shows the flow of the production performed along with the fluctuation of the special symbol when the loss variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol The figure which shows the specific example of the effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 5, when the loss variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern of a special symbol. The figure which shows an example of a structure of the music used by the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The figure which shows the flow of special design change and change production when jackpot change pattern or reach change pattern is selected The figure which shows an example of control of BGM in case N reach production is performed The figure which shows an example of the screen figure in case the result of special symbol determination is losing and the production | presentation by the production pattern of FIG. 23 is performed The figure which shows an example of control of BGM in case SP reach production is performed from N reach production The figure which shows an example of the screen figure in case SP reach production is performed from N reach production FIG. 27 is an example of a screen diagram subsequent to FIG. 26, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen diagram in a case where the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot FIG. 27 is an example of a screen diagram subsequent to FIG. 26, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. The figure which shows an example of control of BGM in the case of performing pseudo-variable production The figure which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration design in each production The figure which shows an example of control of BGM in the case of developing further from SP reach production to SPSP reach production The figure which shows an example of the screen figure after SP reach production is started FIG. 32 is an example of an effect subsequent to FIG. 32 (H), and shows an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot The figure which shows an example of the screen figure when it is an effect following FIG.32 (F) and the result of special symbol determination is a loss. The figure which shows an example of the control of the sound after the SPSP reach production end stage in the case of big hit or loss The figure which shows an example of control of BGM in case SPSP reach production is performed from N reach production The figure which shows an example of the screen figure in case SP reach production is performed from N reach production FIG. 38 is an example of a screen diagram subsequent to FIG. 37, and shows an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot The figure which shows an example of control of BGM when a 1st effect is performed when BGM1 is output when the result of special symbol determination is jackpot The figure which shows an example of the reproduction | regeneration position of BGM at the time of each production start The figure which shows an example of control of BGM when a premier effect is performed when BGM1 is output when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit The figure which shows an example of control of BGM when the operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect in the effect pattern of FIG. 41 when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. The figure which shows an example of the control of 2nd operation promotion effect and BGM in the SPSP reach production end stage of FIG. An example of BGM control when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the premiere effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot Figure showing The figure which shows an example of control of BGM when a notice effect is performed when BGM1 is output when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit An example of BGM control when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the notice effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot Figure showing The figure which shows an example of control of BGM when a 3rd operation promotion effect is performed immediately before SPSP development effect is performed, when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit The figure which shows the other example of control of BGM when a 3rd operation promotion effect is performed immediately before SPSP development effect is performed, when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit 44 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 The figure which shows an example of the production following FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. 47 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The figure which shows an example of an effect in case a blackout effect is performed according to operation in the 3rd operation promotion effect. 53 is a modified example of FIG. 53, and shows an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed immediately before the third operation promotion effect. 53 is a modified example of FIG. 53 and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed during the third operation promotion effect 53 is a modified example of FIG. 53, and is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the blackout effect is performed without performing the third operation promotion effect and develops into the SPSP reach effect. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production | presentation control part 130 57 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. 58 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command process in step 1302 of FIG. 58 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command process in step 1304 of FIG. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control part 140 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control part 140 62 is a detailed flowchart of the changing effect processing in step 1404 of FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the sound control process in step S1422 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the additional display displayed by adding to the number which comprises a decorative design Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the decoration design of a 1st aspect and a 2nd aspect

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination (lottery), and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

  When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the upper plate 28 are guided to a launching device (not shown), and with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the lever 21. Fired into the game area 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to the upper position in the game area 10 and contacted with the game nails, windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for collecting prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 arranged close to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are arranged below the lower plate 29. Drop into a box not shown.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the lever 21 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a prize and a winning combination. It has been. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip are used as a prize and a winning combination. 17 is provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start port 11 as the first start region is a start port that is always open, and the second start port 12 as the second start region is operating the electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when it is open. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins through the second start port 12, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations (lottery) are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big jackpot” is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the jackpot game in which the above-mentioned plate is operated to open the jackpot 13. Is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right hit during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not being played.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

  As illustrated in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened although the prize ball is not paid out. When it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed position after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open position for the specified time is performed a specified number of times. As described above, the second start port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily passed by the operation of the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is referred to as “normal symbol determination (normal symbol lottery)”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination (lottery) is performed.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has various effects such as a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a panel lamp 25, an effect button 26, and an effect. A lever 71 is provided. Further, the frame member 3 incorporates a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 5) not shown in FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that can be easily viewed by a player. The liquid crystal display device 5 includes various display objects such as a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, a hold display for which the number of the special symbol determination is held, etc. An effect image including is displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

  The movable accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and is normally retracted to a retract position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Sometimes it is configured to advance to the front of the screen. A light emitting element (for example, LED) is built in the movable accessory 7, and a part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light by causing the LED to emit light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by operating or emitting light based on the result of the special symbol determination.

  The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing a lighting or blinking pattern and changing a light emission color. The speaker 24 produces a sound effect by outputting music, sound, sound effects, etc. in synchronism with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 5.

[Configuration example of operation means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect button 26 is configured to protrude upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), and is configured such that the upper surface protrudes more than usual when the effect using the effect button 26 is executed. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an effect lever 28 is provided on the upper portion of the frame member 3 as an operation means operated by the player. The effect lever 28 is used for inputting operation information when the player performs an operation of pulling downward or forward.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a posture aspect of the effect lever 28. As shown in FIG. 4, the effect lever 28 includes a grip portion that can be gripped by the player and a support portion for supporting the grip portion. The effect lever 28 is between a “normal posture” (see FIG. 4A) in which the gripping portion is located above (see FIG. 4A) and a “pulling down posture” (see FIG. 4C) in which the gripping portion is located below. The position of the gripping part can be changed. For example, when the operation promotion effect is performed at the end of the SPSP reach effect described later, and the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the effect lever 28 is changed from the normal posture to the lowered posture by the player's lowering operation. Accordingly, a jackpot notification effect for notifying the jackpot is performed.

  For example, in various effects, a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED built in the effect lever 28 emits light. Furthermore, the effect lever 28 may be used for a vibration effect that vibrates the grip portion by operating a motor built in the grip portion.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the first A special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game state indicator 47, a round indicator 48 and the like are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. In the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42, as a determination symbol, a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit”, or the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing” ”Is stopped and displayed.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round indicator 48 displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

  In the following description, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 are called “first special symbols”, and the symbols displayed on the second special symbol display 42 are called “second special symbols”. Are collectively referred to as “special symbols”. Further, the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is referred to as “ordinary symbol”.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a game control unit 100 that controls execution of determination (lottery), control of a jackpot game, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 130, and the like, a game control unit An effect control unit 130 that comprehensively controls effects based on commands received from 100, an image sound control unit 140 that controls effects by images and sounds, and lamp control that controls effects by various lamps and movable accessories 7 Part 150 is provided. In addition to the one shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control unit (not shown) that controls the payout of prize balls.

[Configuration of Game Control Unit 100]
The game control unit 100 includes a CPU 101, a ROM 102, and a RAM 103. Based on the program stored in the ROM 102, the CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the number of payout prize balls such as internal lottery and determination of winning. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The game control unit 100 includes a first start port switch (SW) 111, a second start port switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, and a second gate switch (SW) 115. The prize winning opening switch (SW) 116, the prize winning opening control unit 117, the normal prize winning opening switch (SW) 118, and the display 4 are connected.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100. The electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. To do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100. The big prize opening switch 116 detects that the game ball has won the big prize opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100. In response to a control signal from the game control unit 100, the special prize opening control unit 117 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so that the drive transmission is possible. To do. The normal winning port switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 14 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100.

  When the detection signal from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the big winning port switch 116, or the normal winning port switch 118 is input, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 receives the place where the game ball has won a prize. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the number, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control unit.

  The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the special game is executed by opening and closing the special winning opening 13 through the special winning opening control section 117. In addition, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And if the result of normal symbol determination is successful, the 2nd start port 12 will be temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113.

  In addition, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the start and stop of variation of the special symbol to the effect control unit 130. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits information regarding the variation setting of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the variation setting of the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery to the effect control unit 130. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits, to the effect control unit 130, data indicating the special symbol variation time reduction setting, information for notifying the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 that the game ball has won. .

  In addition, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display device 4. That is, when the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and then the special symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination, the special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 42 and then the special symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Further, when the normal symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 45 in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result.

  Further, the CPU 101 displays the number of holdings for the first special symbol determination on the first special symbol holding display 43, displays the number of holdings for the second special symbol determination on the second special symbol holding display 44, and determines the normal symbol determination. Is displayed on the normal symbol hold indicator 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the gaming state display 47 to display the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 101 causes the round indicator 48 to display the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

[Configuration of Production Control Unit 130]
The effect control unit 130 includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. Based on the program stored in the ROM 132, the CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the effect. The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 131 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time.

  The production control unit 130 sets the production content based on data indicating the result of the special symbol determination and the like sent from the game control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect of the set effect contents to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  The image sound control unit 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal display device 5 and sound output control of the speaker 24. A configuration example of the image sound control unit 140 will be described later.

[Configuration of Lamp Controller 150]
The lamp control unit 150 includes a CPU 151, a ROM 152, and a RAM 153. Based on the program stored in the ROM 152, the CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, the effect lever 28, and the movable accessory 7. The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 151 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. The light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 25, and the movable accessory 7. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the movable accessory 7.

  The CPU 151 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the effect lever 28. , And the light emission of the light emitting element of the movable accessory 7 is controlled. Further, the CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and moves the movable accessory 7, the effect button 26, and the effect lever 28. Control the drive of the motor to operate.

[Description of gaming state]
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming state includes a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is a first probability, and a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is a second probability that is higher than the first probability ( Probable gaming state).

  The first probability and the second probability, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Further, the first probability and the second probability may change depending on the setting.

  For example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by a hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when a setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game control board 100 is operated (for example, pressed) when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, a setting value related to the jackpot probability is set in advance. (For example, any value from “1” to “6”). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

  For example, the larger the set value is, the more likely it will be a jackpot, and the ratio between the second probability, which is a jackpot probability in a high probability gaming state, and the first probability, which is a jackpot probability in a low probability gaming state, is independent of the set value. It may be fixed. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is set to 1/220 when the set value is “1”, and is set to 1/200 when the set value is “2”. When “3”, 1/180 is set. The jackpot probability when in the high probability gaming state is set to 1 / 27.5 (= 1/220 × 8 times) when the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2”. Sometimes 1/25 (= 1/200 × 8 times) is set, and when the set value is “3”, 1 / 22.5 (= 1/180 × 8 times) is set.

  For setting the jackpot probability, a setting key, a setting change switch, and a setting value display device may be provided. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used in combination with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the setting key is turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the jackpot probability is set. Transition to change mode, when the setting key is turned on, and when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, it shifts to the jackpot probability setting confirmation mode, the setting key is turned off, and When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the RAM clear mode (the mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the gaming machine is started up) is entered, the setting key is turned off, When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the power recovery mode (RAM 103 of the game control unit 100) Without initializing, while maintaining the data when the immediately preceding power-off may transition to a mode) to launch a game machine. Note that the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 5) of the game control unit 100 when the power is turned off, and the power is supplied for a certain period (for example, 24 hours). Even if shut off, the data in the RAM 103 can be maintained.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. The auxiliary game state has a relatively high probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination (for example, 1 / 1.1) as compared to the non-auxiliary game state. Further, in the auxiliary gaming state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds × 3 times), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relative The state is very short (for example, 2 seconds). That is, in the auxiliary gaming state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, a normal symbol determination is performed, and it is a hit with a relatively high probability, and the second start port 12 is opened for 1.8 seconds × 3 times. The game ball is easy to win. Further, in the auxiliary game state, the variation time of the special symbol is shortened compared to the non-auxiliary game state.

  On the other hand, when the non-auxiliary gaming state is compared with the auxiliary gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively low (for example, 1/50), and when it is determined to be a win in the normal symbol determination The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds × 1 time), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, when the game ball passes the gate 15 or the gate 16, even if the normal symbol determination is performed, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second start port 12 is 0.1 seconds × Since the game ball is opened only once, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second start port 12.

  In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to the high probability game state or the low probability game state, and is set to the auxiliary game state or the non-auxiliary game state.

  The low probability gaming state and the non-auxiliary gaming state are referred to as “normal gaming state”, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal gaming state. Further, the high probability gaming state and the auxiliary gaming state are referred to as “probability gaming state”. The low-probability gaming state and the auxiliary gaming state are referred to as “time-short gaming state”.

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, except during the jackpot game, the performance is performed in any one of the three types of performance modes corresponding to the current gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is in the normal mode, when the game is controlled in the probability-changing gaming state, in the probability-changing mode, and when the game is controlled in the short-time gaming state, it is in the time-saving mode. Each will produce a performance.

  The normal mode has a plurality of effects (stages, for example, stage A, stage B, etc.). The stage itself does not indicate the degree of reliability for the jackpot, and each stage described below (notification effect, finalized effect, reach effect, etc.) can be executed in any of the normal modes of stage A and stage B.

[Main processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the main process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 repeats a series of processes shown in FIG. 6 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. Execute. Note that the processing of the game control unit 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 6 and subsequent figures is performed by the CPU 101 executing a program stored in the ROM 102.

  First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes a random number update process for updating various jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to select a variation pattern having a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the special symbol is variably displayed. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether the normal symbol lottery is won or lost. The jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal design random number are generated, for example, by a random number generator every time the process of step S1 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S1, the CPU 101 executes a start port switch (SW) process (step S2). In the start port switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start port switch 111 or the second start port switch 112, and each random number (big hit random number, For the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number), values at the time when the detection signal is input are acquired and stored in the RAM 103. The starter switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S2, the CPU 101 executes a gate switch (SW) process (step S3). In the gate switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114 or 115, and if a detection signal is input, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number updated in the process of step S1. And stored in the RAM 103. This gate switch processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). As will be described in detail later, in the special symbol process, whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit is determined. Further, the CPU 101 executes special symbol determination using the random number acquired in the start port switch process in step S2, and causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbols in a variable manner. The special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The special symbol process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S4, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing (step S5). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 101 executes the normal symbol determination using the normal symbol random number acquired in the gate switch process of step S3, displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 45, and then displays the result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S5, the CPU 101 executes a special winning opening process for opening and closing the special winning opening 13 through the special winning opening control unit 117 when the special symbol determination in the special symbol process in step S4 is a big hit. (Step S6). The special winning opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S6, the CPU 101 executes electric tulip processing (step S7). In the electric tulip process, the CPU 101 operates the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 when the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol process in step S5 is won. The electric tulip process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S7, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for managing the number of winning game balls and controlling payout of prize balls according to the prize (step S8). Specifically, when the game ball wins any one of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14, the CPU 101 has the number of awards corresponding to the winning place. Pay out the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out three prize balls when a game ball is won at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, and 15 prize balls when a game ball is won at the big prize port 13. Pay out.

  Subsequent to step S8, the CPU 101 executes output processing (step S9). In the output process of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 to the effect control unit 130 in the start opening switch process of step S2, the special symbol process of step S4, the big winning opening process of step S6, and the like.

[Start-up switch processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the start port switch process executed in the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 11). Determine. When it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (step S201: YES), the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the RAM 103 is stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number of symbols Umax1 (for example, 4) for symbol determination (step S202).

  When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S202: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires values of various random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated by the processing in step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

  Here, various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 11 are stored in the RAM 103, so that the first special symbol related to the holding ball whose holding number U1 is increased in step S203. The right to make a decision will be withheld. As will be described in detail later, the reserved right for the first special symbol determination is digested in the special symbol processing in step S4, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped after a predetermined time. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

  Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes pre-determination processing based on various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The pre-determination process in step S205 is a determination process for the right of the first special symbol determination that has been put on hold, and is a pre-determining whether or not a big hit, a big win symbol in the case of a big win, a variation pattern, and the like and showing the determination result This is processing for generating determination information. Thereafter, the CPU 101 sets a hold command including the advance determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The hold command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is put on hold, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. In the prior determination process in step S205, the various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be generated as they are as prior determination information, and the prior determination information may be included in the pending command.

  When it is determined “NO” in step S201, when it is determined “NO” in step S202, or when the process of step S206 is executed, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON” (whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 12). When it is determined that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (step S207: YES), the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the RAM 103 is stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of symbols Umax2 (for example, 4) for symbol determination is smaller (step S208).

  When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S208: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated in the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

  Then, the CPU 101 uses the various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 by the process of step S210 to execute a pre-determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 (step S211), and stores a hold command including pre-determination information in the RAM 103. Set (step S212).

  When it is determined “NO” in step S207, when it is determined “NO” in step S208, or when the process of step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 ends the start port switch process, and performs the gate switch process. Proceed with the process.

[Gate switch processing by game control unit 100]
FIG. 8 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 determines whether the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 (ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 or 115 is “ON”) is input. It is determined whether or not the switch 114 or 115 is “ON” (step S301).

  When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 is “ON” (step S301: YES), the normal symbol determination hold number G stored in the RAM 103 is the maximum normal symbol determination hold number Gmax (for example, 4) It is determined whether it is less than (step S302).

  When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number G is less than the maximum hold number Gmax (step S302: YES), the CPU 101 updates the hold number G to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S303). A normal symbol random number used for symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). Note that a pre-determination process may be performed on the normal symbol random number stored in step S304 in the same manner as in step S205, and the result of the pre-determination process may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 as a normal symbol hold command. .

[Special symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol process in step S4 in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game (during a big hit game) is in progress based on information stored in the RAM 103, for example (step S401). When it is determined that the special game is being played (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 ends the special symbol process.

  When determining that the special game is not being played (step S401: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is being variably displayed (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the RAM 103 is equal to or greater than “1” (step S403). ), When it is determined that the number is “1” or more (step S403: YES), “1” is subtracted from the holding number U2 to digest only one holding ball (step S404).

  When the CPU 101 determines that the number of holdings U <b> 2 is not equal to or greater than “1” (the second special symbol determination is not held) (step S <b> 403: NO), the number of held first special symbol determinations stored in the RAM 103. It is determined whether or not U1 is “1” or more (step S405). When it is determined that U1 is “1” or more (step S405: YES), “1” is subtracted from the number of holdings U1 and 1 is held. Only digest (step S406). On the other hand, if the CPU 101 determines in step S405 that the number of holds U1 is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S405: NO), the CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command in the RAM 103 and ends the special symbol process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 101 executes jackpot determination processing following step S404 or step S406 (step S407). Hereinafter, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Big hit judgment processing)
As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S431). Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit following the processing of step S404 in FIG. 9, the big hit random number (step S2 of step S2) related to the holding ball obtained by subtracting the holding number U2 in the processing of step S404. It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 by the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that of the low probability gaming state. On the other hand, when determining whether or not it is a big hit following the process of step S406 of FIG. 9, the CPU 101 determines a big hit random number related to the hold ball obtained by subtracting the hold number U1 in the process of step S406 (the RAM 103 in the process of step S2). Whether or not the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102 matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the ROM 102. Thus, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit.

  Here, when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 determines the symbol random number based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the above jackpot random number. Is performed (step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines which of the random numbers assigned to each of the jackpot symbols stored in advance in the ROM 102 matches the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in step S2. To determine the jackpot symbol. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot symbol as setting information in the RAM 103 (step S433).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S431 that it is not a big hit (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets a lost symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

  After the process of step S433 or the process of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot determination process and returns the process to the special symbol process of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 9, following the jackpot determination process in step S407, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern setting process (step S408). Hereinafter, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a probability change game flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not a high-probability gaming state is set (step S461). When the probability variation game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not an auxiliary game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in an auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets a normal table as a variation pattern table in the RAM 103 (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets a time reduction table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S464).

  On the other hand, when the probability variation game flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S466).

  The variation pattern table is a table in which conditions for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are predetermined. Each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation patterns. The jackpot variation pattern that is selected when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, when there is no reach and no reach (predetermined variation time using a reach random number) Loss fluctuation pattern selected (when no change is selected when a fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds or more is selected) (for example, when reach is reached) 13 seconds) and the reach fluctuation pattern selected when it is decided to select the fluctuation pattern above. For example, the jackpot variation pattern included in the normal table includes a variation pattern such as a variation time of 25 seconds, 60 seconds, 100 seconds, 120 seconds, and the reach variation pattern included in the normal table includes a variation time of 22 seconds. , 57 seconds, 92 seconds, 112 seconds, etc. Further, the loss variation pattern included in the normal table includes a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds, 12 seconds, or the like. In the time reduction table and the probability variation table, there is a variation pattern that is shorter than the variation variation pattern in the normal table (for example, the variation time is 2 seconds). An example of the variation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18A to 18C.

  Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of the jackpot determination is not a loss, that is, if the jackpot is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 advances the processing to the next step 468.

  When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs a reach random number determination process (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern longer than a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) based on the acquired reach random number. Then, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S468 following the process of step S467.

  In step S468, the CPU 101 performs a variation pattern random number determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern in which the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches the value set for each variation pattern included in the set variation pattern table.

  In this manner, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number acquired in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined variation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the process of step S469, the CPU 101 ends the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, and proceeds with the processes after step S409 in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 9, following the process of step S <b> 408, the CPU 101 indicates the symbol setting information set in step S <b> 407, the variation pattern setting information set in step S <b> 408, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A change start command including information and the like is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This variation start command is a command for instructing the execution of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

  Subsequent to the process in step S409, the CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the step S409 (step S410), and measures the variation time. Start (step S411). Note that the special symbol variation display is performed using the second special symbol display 42 when the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed subsequent to the processing of step S404, and subsequent to the processing of step S406. If so, the first special symbol display 41 is used.

  When the CPU 101 determines “YES” in the process of step S402 or when the process of step S411 is executed, the CPU 101 performs the change corresponding to the change pattern set in the process of step S408 from the start of the measurement of the change time in step S411. It is determined whether time has passed (step S412).

  When the CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), the CPU 101 sets a variation stop command for notifying that the variation display of the special symbol is stopped in the RAM 103 (step S413). The started variation display of the special symbol is terminated (step S414), and the measured variation time is reset (step S415). Thereby, in the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the symbol (hit or symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 is stopped and displayed. The result is notified. The change stop command set in the process of step S413 is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 of FIG.

  After the process of step S415, the CPU 101 executes a stop process (step S416). Details of the stop process will be described later.

  If “YES” is determined in step S401, “NO” is determined in step S405, “NO” is determined in step S412, or if the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 The special symbol process is terminated, and the normal symbol process of step S5 in FIG. 6 is executed.

[Processing during stop by game control unit 100]
Next, the stop process in step S416 in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing the stop process in step S416 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 (step S480). If the CPU 101 determines that the game is a jackpot (step S480: YES), the CPU 101 sets the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM 103 to “ON” (step S481).

  Following the processing of step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and the probability change game flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S482). Following the processing in step S482, the CPU 101 starts opening (step S483), and sets an opening command in the RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started and a jackpot effect during the jackpot game. The command is executed by the output process in step S9 of FIG. By being executed, it is transmitted to the effect control unit 130.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S485). When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S485: YES), “1” is subtracted from the auxiliary game remaining number J stored in the RAM 103, and the J is updated (step S486). . The auxiliary game remaining count J indicates the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations (the number of executions of the special symbol determination) in which the auxiliary game state is maintained, and is set in a game state setting process that is executed after the jackpot game is performed. . Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

  Subsequent to the process of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game remaining count J is “0” (step S487). When it is determined that the auxiliary game remaining count J is “0” (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to “OFF” (step S488).

  When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not “ON” (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game remaining number J is not “0” (step S487: NO) ), The CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to “ON” (step S489).

  When it is determined that the probability variation game flag is set to “ON” (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the high probability game remaining number X stored in the RAM 103, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high probability remaining game count X indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is performed in the high probability game state, and is set in a game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

  Subsequent to step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual count X is “0” (step S491). When it is determined that the high-probability game remaining number X is “0” (step S491: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to “OFF” (step S492).

  When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not “ON” (step S489: NO), or the high probability remaining game count X is “ When it is determined that it is not “0” (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 ends the suspension process of FIG.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the details of the normal symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol process in step S5 of FIG.

  First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, and is a flag that indicates whether or not a hit game in which the electric tulip 17 is activated. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of normal symbol determination is a win. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary gaming state (whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag is ON). If it is determined that the auxiliary flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG.

  If it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 45 is being displayed (step S502). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol determination pending number G stored in the RAM 103 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S503). When it is determined that the number of holds G is not “1” or more (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

  When the CPU 101 determines that the reserved number G is “1” or more (step S503: YES), the CPU 101 updates the reserved number G to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S504), and executes normal symbol random number determination processing. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number acquired in the process of step S3 in response to the game ball passing through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. Is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S506). In the case of the auxiliary gaming state, the winning value of the normal symbol random number is set more than in the case of the non-auxiliary gaming state, and in the case of the auxiliary gaming state, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. Is higher than in the non-auxiliary gaming state.

  If the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (step S506: NO), the CPU 101 sets the lost symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the win symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

  Following the process of step S507 or the process of step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game state is set based on whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

  If the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: NO), it sets the normal symbol variation time, which is the time for the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol variably, at, for example, 25 seconds (step S510). Conversely, if it is determined that the game is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the processing of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM 103.

  Following the processing of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 starts normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display unit 45 (step S512), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S513). .

  On the other hand, if the CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol change display is being performed on the normal symbol display unit 45 (step S502: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the normal symbol change display (step S516). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time when measurement is started by the process of step S513 has reached the normal symbol change time set by the process of step S512 or step S513, the change display of the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the end timing has come. If it is determined that the end timing has not come (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG.

  When the CPU 101 determines that it is the end timing of the normal symbol fluctuation display (step S516: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol fluctuation display by the normal symbol display 45 (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to stop-display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. Thereby, the result of normal symbol determination is notified.

  Following the process of step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to step S506, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S519). If it is determined that the win is a win (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is set to “ON”. It sets (step S520). The auxiliary flag is set to “ON” and the electric tulip 17 described later is performed, whereby the electric tulip 17 is activated.

  When the process of step S520 is performed, when it is determined NO in the process of step S516, or when it is determined NO in the process of step S519, the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG.

  In addition, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, the second start port 12 is opened long (for example, opened for 5.6 seconds), and the second start port 12 is opened short (for example, opened for 0.1 second). You may win.

[Big prize opening process by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the details of the big prize opening process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the special winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game flag (big hit game flag) is ON (step S601). When the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot game started in step S483 is in progress.

  If it is during opening (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). In addition, opening time changes with jackpot symbols. If the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets “0” to R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) according to the result of the jackpot determination process, An opening pattern (opening time, number of opening times, interval time, etc.) of the special winning opening 13 is set (step S604).

  Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot symbol. Although details will be described later, the number of rounds varies depending on the jackpot symbol, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

  Following step S604, the CPU 101 adds “1” to R and stores it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the special winning opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the process of step S607, the CPU 101 next executes a process of step S611.

  On the other hand, if the opening is not in progress (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether the ending is in progress (step S608). If it is during ending (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S617. If it is not ending (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is during the interval between round games (step S609). If it is during the interval (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S610), and if it has elapsed (step S610: YES), then the processing of step S605 is performed. Execute. When the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 ends the big prize opening process.

  On the other hand, when it is not during the interval (step S609: NO), that is, when the round game is being performed, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the big prize opening process.

  For example, the round end condition of the long open round game to be described later is, for example, that 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of opening control of the big winning opening in this round in step S606, or the large end of this round in step S606. This is that the number of winning a game ball to the big winning opening after starting the opening control of the winning opening has become a predetermined value. When any one of the two conditions is satisfied, the CPU 101 determines that the round end condition is satisfied.

  If the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the special winning opening release control in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). The round end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process in step S9 of FIG.

  Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S604.

  If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the big prize opening process.

  When it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts ending (step S616) and sets an ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

  If the CPU 101 performs the process of step S617 or determines YES in the process of step S608, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S616 (step S616). S618). If the ending time has elapsed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current special game is a jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process (step S620). Details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S620 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (big hit game flag) to OFF (step S621).

  If NO is determined in the process of step S601, NO is determined in the process of step S611, NO is determined in the process of step S618, NO is determined in the process of step S610, NO is determined in the process of step S603. When the process of step S615 is executed, or when the process of step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the big prize opening process shown in FIG.

[Game state setting process by game control unit 100]
Next, the gaming state setting process in step S620 of FIG. 14 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of jackpot of this time is a highly probable jackpot with a transition to the high probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a highly probable big hit based on the symbol set in the big hit determination process. If it is a highly probable hit (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variable game flag to ON (step S631), and sets Xmax to the high probability game remaining count X (step S632). Xmax is a predetermined value, and a very large value, for example, 10,000 is set as Xmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set for X, the game is effectively controlled in the high-probability gaming state until the next jackpot.

  When the process of step S632 is performed or when it is determined NO in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot accompanied by a transition to the auxiliary gaming state (step S633). When it determines with YES by step S633, CPU101 sets an auxiliary | assistant game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets the value of the auxiliary game remaining number J in accordance with the symbol set in the jackpot determination process (step S635).

  When the process of step S635 is performed, or when it is determined NO in step S633, the CPU 101 ends the gaming state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the electric tulip process in step S7 of FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process of FIG.

  First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag is set to “ON” (step S701). If it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to “ON” (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

  When determining that the auxiliary flag is set to “ON” (step S701: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S702). If it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag is ON by determining whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag is ON (step S703).

  If the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S703: NO), for example, the CPU 101 sets an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 0.1 second is performed in the RAM 103 (step S704).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S703: YES), as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17, for example, an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 1.8 seconds is performed three times. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

  After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 by the process of step S704 or step S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 with the set operation pattern (step S706).

  When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702: YES), whether or not the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 has been completed. Is determined (step S707). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S708).

  When it determines with NO by the process of step S701, when it determines with NO by the process of step S707, or when the process of step S708 is performed, CPU101 complete | finishes an electric tulip process.

  Next, the jackpot symbol selected when the result of the special game determination is a jackpot will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a breakdown of jackpot symbols selected in accordance with winning at each start opening, and is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when a game ball wins the first starting port 11 and wins a big hit, any one of the big win symbol Z1 to the big win symbol Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. A jackpot game (a kind of special game) corresponding to each jackpot symbol is played. Further, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 12 and a big hit is made, any one of the jackpot symbols Z4 to Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and each jackpot symbol is displayed. A jackpot game (a kind of special game) is performed according to the game.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the winning at the first starting port 11, the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected at a rate of 10% and the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected at a rate of 50%. The jackpot symbol Z3 is selected at a rate of 40%.

  When the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected, as a jackpot game, a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of game balls won in the jackpot 13 is 10 or after the jackpot 13 is opened) Until the time 29.5 seconds elapses), the long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is opened is played 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as “R”)). For example, in a 10R jackpot game, about 1500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected, a 4R long open round game is played as the jackpot game. After the jackpot symbol Z1 or the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a probability change game state (a high probability game state and an auxiliary game state), and the probability change game substantially until the next jackpot game. The state continues.

  The jackpot with the jackpot symbol Z1 is referred to as “10R probability variation jackpot”, and the jackpot with the jackpot symbol Z2 is referred to as “4R probability variation jackpot”.

  When the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed. After the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a low probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state (time-short gaming state). The short-time gaming state continues until the special symbol change is performed 100 times. When the 100th special symbol variation is completed, the gaming machine 1 is returned to the normal gaming state. The jackpot with the jackpot symbol Z3 may be referred to as “4R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the winning at the second starting port 12, the jackpot symbol Z4 is selected at a rate of 50%, the jackpot symbol Z5 is selected at a rate of 10%, and the jackpot symbol at a rate of 40%. The symbol Z6 is selected.

  When the jackpot symbol Z4 or Z5 is selected, after the jackpot game, it shifts to the probability change game state. The probable gaming state continues substantially until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol Z6 is selected, the game shifts to the hourly gaming state after the jackpot game, and the hourly gaming state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times.

  The jackpot symbol Z4 is a symbol indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot where a 10R long open round game is performed. The jackpot symbol Z5 is a symbol indicating the 4R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot where a 4R long open round game is performed. The jackpot symbol Z6 is a symbol indicating 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of fluctuation production and reach production)
Here, the fluctuation effect and the reach effect will be described. “Variation effect” is an effect that is performed while the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is changing, and is started when the special symbol starts to change, and is ended when the special symbol changes. This is a production. Fluctuation effects include effects using decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, effects using other images, effects using sound output from the speaker 24, effects using the movable accessory 7, panel lamps 25, an effect using the frame lamp 37, an effect using the effect button 26, and an effect using the effect lever 28.

  The “reach effect” is an effect that uses a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 and is an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. Although specifically described later, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays a decorative symbol that changes in accordance with the start of the change of the special symbol and stops in response to the end of the change of the special symbol. The decorative symbol is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol being executed. Whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss is notified by the decorative symbol stop mode. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays three decorative symbols, left, middle, and right. Each decorative design is an image including, for example, numbers from “1” to “9” and a character image corresponding to the numbers. In response to the start of the change of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols start to change, and when the same three types of decorative symbols are stopped together (for example, “777” or “444”), the jackpot is notified. . In addition, the state where the same three types of decorative designs are arranged is called “zolo eyes”. On the other hand, if the three types of decorative symbols are stopped without being aligned, a loss has been notified. The reach effect is an effect that makes the player expect that three similar types of decorative symbols will be available.

  For example, the reach effect is an effect in which the same type of decorative design stops on the left and right, and the decorative design fluctuates in the middle region, and the player is notified that the same type of decorative design on the left and right stops in the middle region. It is a production that makes you expect.

  In this embodiment, there are four types of reach effects: normal reach effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “N reach”), SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and full rotation reach. The N reach production is the production that has the lowest possibility of being a big hit (also called expectation or reliability) among the plurality of reach productions. For example, the expectation level of N reach production is 0.1% or less. In the present embodiment, there are two N reach productions, N reach productions A and B, and the expectation of jackpot varies depending on each N reach production, and the production time also differs. The longer the production time of N reach production, the higher the degree of expectation.

  The SP reach production is a production with higher expectation than the N reach production, and is a reach production that has a longer production time than the N reach production. For example, the expected degree of SP reach production is 5 to 10%. In the present embodiment, there are three SP reach effects A to C as SP reach effects, and the expectation of jackpot varies depending on each SP reach effect, and the effect time also differs. The longer the SP reach production time, the higher the degree of expectation.

  The SPSP reach production is a production with higher expectation than the SP reach production, and is a reach production with a longer production time than the SP reach production. For example, the expected degree of SPSP reach production is 30 to 50%. In this embodiment, there are three SPSP reach effects A to C as SPSP reach effects, and the expectation of jackpots differs depending on each SPSP reach effect, and the effect time also differs. The longer the production time of SPSP reach production, the higher the degree of expectation.

  The full rotation reach is a reach production with an expectation of 100% (that is, determination of jackpot). The full rotation reach is an effect that varies in the vertical direction, for example, in a state where three similar decorative symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. For example, “333” as three decorative symbols moves from the upper region to the lower region of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and then “444” as three decorative symbols moves from the upper region to the lower region of the screen. In the full rotation reach, no matter what kind of decorative design is finally stopped, all three of the same type of decorative symbols are stopped and become a big hit.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern will be described. 18A to 18C are diagrams illustrating an example of a variation pattern table used in, for example, a normal gaming state. FIG. 18A is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table used for selecting a jackpot variation pattern. FIG. 18B is a table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is losing and a variation time of a predetermined time or more is selected using a reach random number, in order to select a reach variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach fluctuation pattern table used. FIG. 18C is a table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is losing and the fluctuation time of the predetermined time or more is not selected using the reach random number, and for selecting the losing fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the loss fluctuation pattern table used for.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the jackpot variation pattern table includes a jackpot variation pattern OP1-1 (variation time 20 seconds) and OP1-2 (variation time 25 seconds). The jackpot variation patterns OP1-1 and OP1-2 are each selected at a rate of 0.5%. When the big hit variation pattern OP1-1 or OP1-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a change effect including a normal reach effect as a reach effect.

  Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, after the three decorative symbols start to change in response to the start of the special symbol variation, the same type of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the normal reach production A is performed. Done.

  When the big hit variation pattern OP1-2 is selected, the three types of decorative symbols start to change in response to the start of the change of the special symbol, and then the same type of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the normal reach effect B is performed.

  In addition, before the N reach effect is started (or after it is started), a pseudo variation effect (pseudo ream) may be performed. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect in which three decorative symbols temporarily stop on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 and re-variate. The temporary stop is a state in which the three decorative symbols do not stop completely but slightly change (for example, swing up and down). The case where the three decorative symbols do not change again is sometimes referred to as “no simulation”. In addition, when three decorative symbols are re-variable more than once, the first re-variation is “pseudo 2”, the second re-variation is “pseudo 3”, and the third re-variation is “pseudo 4”. There is. For example, one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects (re-variation) may be performed before the reach is established (the same kind of decorative symbols on the left and right are stopped), and then the N reach effect may be started. Further, the reach may be established without performing the pseudo variation effect, and then one or more pseudo variation effects may be performed, and the reach may be established again to start the N reach effect. Further, one or more pseudo-variation effects may be performed before reach is established, then reach may be established, and then one or more pseudo-variation effects may be performed, and reach may be established again.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the jackpot variation pattern table includes a jackpot variation pattern OP2-1 (variation time 40 seconds), OP2-2 (variation time 50 seconds), and OP2-3 (variation time 60 seconds). ) And The jackpot variation patterns OP2-1, OP2-2, and OP2-3 are selected at a rate of 1%, 3%, and 5%, respectively. When any one of the big hit variation patterns OP2-1 to OP2-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variable effect including the N reach effect and the SP reach effect as the reach effect.

  Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP2-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect A is performed. . When the jackpot variation pattern OP2-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect B is performed. When the jackpot variation pattern OP2-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect C is performed.

  The jackpot variation pattern table includes a jackpot variation pattern OP3-1 (variation time 100 seconds), OP3-2 (variation time 110 seconds), and OP3-3 (variation time 120 seconds). The jackpot variation patterns OP3-1, OP3-2, and OP3-3 are selected at a rate of 10%, 15%, and 24%, respectively. When any one of the big hit variation patterns OP3-1 to OP3-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a change effect including an N reach effect, an SP reach effect, and an SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

  Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. Thereafter, SPSP reach production A is performed. Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, N reach production is performed, then SP reach production is performed, and then SPSP reach production B is performed. Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, N reach production is performed, then SP reach production is performed, and then SPSP reach production C is performed.

  The jackpot variation pattern table includes a jackpot variation pattern OP4-1 (variation time 80 seconds), OP4-2 (variation time 90 seconds), and OP4-3 (variation time 100 seconds). The jackpot variation patterns OP4-1, OP4-2, and OP4-3 are selected at a rate of 8%, 13%, and 18%, respectively. When any of the big hit variation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variable effect including an N reach effect and an SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

  Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP4-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach A effect is performed. . When the jackpot variation pattern OP4-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect B is performed. When the jackpot variation pattern OP4-3 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary in response to the start of variation of the special symbol, N reach effect is performed, and then SPSP reach effect C is performed.

  The jackpot variation pattern table includes a jackpot variation pattern OP5 (variation time 150 seconds). The jackpot variation pattern OP5 is selected at a rate of 1%. When the big hit variation pattern OP5 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a change effect including a full rotation reach effect as the reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the reach fluctuation pattern table includes a reach fluctuation pattern HP1-1 (fluctuation time of 17 seconds) and HP1-2 (fluctuation time of 22 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP1-1 and HP1-2 are selected at a ratio of 30% and 20%, respectively. When the reach variation pattern HP1-1 or HP1-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a normal reach effect as a reach effect.

  Specifically, when the reach variation pattern HP1-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary in response to the start of variation of the special symbol, and the normal reach effect A is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP1-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, and the normal reach effect B is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the reach variation pattern table includes a variation pattern HP2-1 (variation time 37 seconds), HP2-2 (variation time 47 seconds), and HP2-3 (variation time 57 seconds). And are included. The reach variation patterns HP2-1, HP2-2, and HP2-3 are selected at 10%, 8%, and 7%, respectively. When one of the reach variation patterns HP2-1 to HP2-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect and an SP reach effect as the reach effect.

  Specifically, when the reach variation pattern HP2-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect A is performed. . Further, when the reach variation pattern HP2-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect B is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP2-3 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect C is performed.

  The reach variation pattern table includes a reach variation pattern HP3-1 (variation time 92 seconds), HP3-2 (variation time 102 seconds), and HP3-3 (variation time 112 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP3-1, HP3-2, and HP3-3 are selected at a rate of 5%, 3%, and 2%, respectively. When any one of the reach variation patterns HP3-1 to HP3-3 is selected, a variation effect including an N reach effect, an SP reach effect, and an SPSP reach effect is performed by the effect control unit 130 as a reach effect.

  Specifically, when the reach variation pattern HP3-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. Thereafter, SPSP reach production A is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP3-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production B is performed. In addition, when the reach variation pattern HP3-3 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production C is performed.

  The reach variation pattern table includes a reach variation pattern HP4-1 (variation time 72 seconds), HP4-2 (variation time 82 seconds), and HP4-3 (variation time 92 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP4-1, HP4-2, and HP4-3 are selected at a rate of 7%, 5%, and 3%, respectively. When any one of the reach variation patterns HP4-1 to HP4-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect and an SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

  Specifically, when the reach variation pattern HP4-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect A is performed. . When the reach variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, N reach effect is performed, and then SPSP reach effect B is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP4-3 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect C is performed.

  The reach variation pattern table does not include a variation pattern (OP5 described above) in which full rotation reach is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, the loss variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern HP5-1 (variation time of 8 seconds) selected when the number of first special symbol determination pending (U1) is 2 or less. , HP5-2 (variation time 12 seconds). If the result of the special symbol determination is loss and there is no reach (if it is not determined that a change pattern longer than a predetermined change time (for example, 13 seconds) is selected using a reach random number), the change change pattern HP5- 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and the loss variation pattern HP5-2 is selected with a probability of 20%. Also, the loss variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern HP5-3 (variation time 3 seconds) selected when the number of first special symbol determination hold (U1) is 3 or more. When the number of holds is 3 or more, the loss variation pattern HP5-3 is selected at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, when it is determined to be a big hit, the SPSP reach effect is easily performed, and the N reach effect is difficult to be performed. Further, when it is determined to be lost, the SPSP reach effect is difficult to perform, and the N reach effect is easily performed. For this reason, when the SPSP reach effect is performed, the possibility of a big hit after that is relatively high, and when the N reach effect is executed, the possibility of a big hit after that is relatively low.

  In addition, with respect to a plurality of SP reach effects, it is easy to execute in the order of SP reach effects C, B, A in the case of a big hit, and in the order of SP reach effects A, B, C in the case of a loss. Yes. For this reason, the big hit expectation degree is high in the order of SP reach production A, B, C. In addition, with respect to a plurality of SPSP reach effects, it is easy to execute in the order of SPSP reach effects C, B, A in the case of a big hit, and in the order of SPSP reach effects A, B, C in the case of a loss. Yes. For this reason, the big hit expectation degree is high in the order of SPSP reach production A, B, C.

  There may be a plurality of special symbol variation patterns (variation times) other than those shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B. For example, for each reach effect, there may be a variation pattern including a pseudo-continuous and a variation pattern not including a pseudo-continuous. In this case, the selection rate of each variation pattern is set such that the greater the number of pseudo-reams (the number of re-variations), the higher the expectation of jackpot. For example, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach production A, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach production B, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach production C, pseudo 3 and SP reach production A There may be a variation pattern including a variation pattern including a pseudo 3 and an SP reach production B, and a variation pattern including a pseudo 3 and an SP reach production C. Further, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SPSP reach production A, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SPSP reach production B, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SPSP reach production C, pseudo 3 and SPSP reach production A There may be a variation pattern including a variation pattern including a pseudo 3 and an SPSP reach effect B, and a variation pattern including a pseudo 3 and an SPSP reach effect C.

  Further, as the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern in which an SPSP reach effect that does not include the N reach effect and the SP reach effect is performed. Further, as the jackpot variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern in which any of the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect is not performed. When such a variation pattern is selected, the jackpot is notified suddenly without the reach effect.

(Production in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment)
Next, an outline of effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

(Direction by loss variation pattern)
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a change in the special symbol when the loss variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a flow of effects performed in association therewith. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of effects performed in the liquid crystal display device 5 when the loss variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The decorative symbol 51 includes a left decorative symbol 51a in the left region, a middle decorative symbol 51b in the middle region, and a right decorative symbol 51c in the right region. Each of the decorative symbols 51a, 51b, 51c includes a numeric image (for example, “2” for the left decorative symbol) and a predetermined image corresponding to the numeric character (for example, a character image or a specific person image (not shown)). Is a combined image. A normal background image is displayed as a background image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The background image is an image that becomes the background of the image displayed on the screen, and is arranged in the innermost layer of the screen. Images other than the background image (for example, the decorative symbol 51, the hold display, the fourth symbol, etc.) are arranged in a layer on the near side of the background image. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, images are managed by a plurality of layers, and images arranged in the front layer are preferentially displayed on the screen. A hold display 52 is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The hold display 52 is an image indicating the hold of the special symbol determination right, and is displayed, for example, as a maximum of four images indicating the hold of the first special symbol determination. FIG. 20A shows a state where three first special symbol determinations are held, and a hold display 521, a hold display 522, and a hold display 523 are displayed. In addition, a changing display 53 indicating the current change of the special symbol is displayed on the right side of the hold display 521. The changing display 53 is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the current change of the special symbol.

  Further, for example, the fourth symbol 55 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. The fourth symbol 55 is a symbol for effect that varies according to the variation of the first special symbol and stops according to the stop of the first special symbol. The fourth symbol 55 is a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, but a fourth symbol (not shown) corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed on the screen.

  If the game ball wins, for example, the first start port 11 during the change of the special symbol, the right of the special symbol determination is held. When the special symbol determination right is reserved, a hold display 52 is additionally displayed. In the case of winning a prize at the first start port 11, a pre-determination is made as to whether or not a big hit is made. Based on the result of this prior determination, the display mode of the hold display 52 to be additionally displayed may be displayed in a display mode different from normal. For example, the display forms of the hold display 52 include white, blue, green, red, and gold, and are normally displayed in “white”. The display mode of the hold display 52 is such that the degree of expectation (possibility of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination related to the hold display 52) increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold. Is determined. For example, the degree of expectation of “blue” in the hold display 52 is 3%, the degree of expectation of “green” is 15%, the degree of expectation of “red” is 35%, and the degree of expectation of “gold” is 65 %.

  When the hold display 52 is additionally displayed, a predetermined winning sound may be output from the speaker 24. For example, when the hold display 52 is displayed in normal “white”, the first winning sound is output, and when the hold display 52 is displayed in “blue”, the second winning sound is output. When the hold display 52 is displayed in “green”, a third winning sound may be output. Further, when the hold display 52 is displayed in “red”, the fourth winning sound may be output, and when the hold display 52 is displayed as “gold”, the fifth winning sound may be output. . When the second winning sound to the fifth winning sound indicating that the expectation degree of the hold display 52 is higher than normal may be output, the sound may be output at a volume higher than that of the first winning sound.

  In addition, when the hold display 52 is displayed in the normal “white”, no winning sound is output, and when displayed in a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal “white”, it depends on the display mode. Different winning sounds may be output. Moreover, the display mode of the hold display 52 changes to any one of the plurality of display modes in the variation of the special symbol after the next, not only when winning at the start port but after the winning at the start port. The winning sound may be output at the time of change.

  For example, the hold display 52 is additionally displayed in the usual “white” in accordance with the winning at the start opening, and the “white” hold display 52 changes to “blue” during the subsequent special symbol fluctuation. Also good. An effect in which the hold display 52 changes is referred to as a “hold change effect”. When the hold change effect is executed, a sound corresponding to the color of the change hold display 52 (the same sound as the winning sound) is output. Note that when the hold change effect is executed, a sound different from the winning sound may be output. Further, the hold change effect may be performed a plurality of times for one hold display 52. For example, the hold display 52 may be displayed as “white” at the time of winning a prize, then changed to “blue”, further changed to “green”, and then changed to “red”. Further, the hold change effect may be performed a plurality of times during one special symbol variation, or may be performed a plurality of times during a plurality of special symbol variations.

  Further, during the change of the special symbol, the changing display 53 corresponding to the change may be changed to a mode with a higher expectation. An effect in which the display 53 during change is referred to as a “display change effect during change”. When the changing display changing effect is executed, a sound corresponding to the changing color of the changing display 53 (the same sound as the winning sound) is output. When the display change effect during change is executed, a sound different from the winning sound may be output. Moreover, the display change effect during change may be performed a plurality of times during the change of the special symbol.

  Here, when the changing display 53 is in a predetermined display mode (for example, red), for example, an SPSP reach effect (an effect with higher expectation than the SP reach effect) may be executed with a probability of 100%. . In this case, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode, a suggestion effect suggesting that the SPSP reach effect may be performed may be performed. For example, an image described as “SPSP reach!” May be displayed as the suggestion effect. Even if the SPSP reach production is performed, the suggestion production may be executed or may not be executed. Therefore, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode (when the current change starts to change to a predetermined display mode or when the current change starts to change to a predetermined display mode) The SPSP reach effect is performed regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. When the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode, the SPSP reach effect may be executed with a probability of 80% instead of 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 19, for example, when the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42 may be used) starts changing the first special symbol (time T0), a start effect is performed. For example, as the start effect, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), an effect in which the three decorative symbols 51 that have been stopped and displayed start to move downward in the screen is performed. Further, as the start effect, an effect that the changing display 53 is deleted and the hold displays 521 to 523 shift to the right is performed. The rightmost hold display 521 is displayed as a changing display 53. In the start effect, the three decorative symbols 51 may start to move simultaneously, or the decorative symbols may start moving in order (for example, left, right, and middle). Further, in the start effect, each decorative pattern may operate in a different operation mode. For example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol may move upward and then move downward, while the middle decorative symbol may move downward without moving upward. Further, the fourth symbol 55 also starts to change in response to the start of the change of the special symbol.

  After the start effect is performed, high-speed fluctuation that fluctuates the decorative pattern 51 at high speed is performed (FIGS. 19 and 20C). After the high speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds), the stop effect is performed. For example, as a stop effect, the left decorative design 51a moves downward from above at a low speed and temporarily stops in the left region (FIG. 20D), and then the right decorative design 51c moves at a low speed from above to below. Then, it temporarily stops in the right region (FIG. 20E), and thereafter, the medium decorative design 51b moves downward from above at a low speed and temporarily stops in the middle region (FIG. 20F). Then, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 20 (G)), and the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time T1 when the variation time (for example, 12 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed from the time T0. In response to the stop display, the three decorative symbols 51 display a stop (completely stop, referred to as “main stop”) (FIG. 20H). Further, the fourth symbol 55 is also stopped and displayed in response to the special symbol stop display.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol determination (FIG. 20A) that has been suspended is performed at time T2. Special symbol determination relating to the hold display 522) is performed, and the variation of the special symbol is started. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 5, the start effect and the high-speed fluctuation are performed in the same manner as described above, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time T3 when the variation time (for example, 8 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed from the time T2. The decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in response to the display stop of the special symbol. Furthermore, when a predetermined stop display period elapses, at time T4, the reserved special symbol determination (special symbol determination related to the hold display 523 in FIG. 20A) is performed, and a start effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 19, a predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 24 during the special symbol variation display. Specifically, in the case of the loss variation pattern, BGM1 is output from the speaker 24.

  BGM1 is a sound output by playing back predetermined acoustic data (for example, a wav format file). BGM1 is, for example, a part of a predetermined music (for example, a prelude part of a music). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that uses a specific singer that actually exists as a motif, and a specific singer's music is used as the music corresponding to the BGM 1.

  BGM1 is a music piece having a predetermined playback time. For example, the BGM 1 has a reproduction time longer than the fluctuation time of the loss variation pattern (for example, 15 seconds) or a reproduction time shorter than the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation pattern (for example, 3 seconds).

  In a state in which BGM1 is not output, the reproduction of BGM1 is started from the beginning in response to the start of the special symbol change. BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output even during the special symbol stop display period. When there is no special symbol determination pending, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses after the special symbol is stopped, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs a customer waiting effect. In the customer waiting effect, a moving image or a still image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, but the BGM1 is not output. When the change of the special symbol is started during the customer waiting effect, the change effect using the decorative symbol 51 is started in the liquid crystal display device 5 and the reproduction of the BGM 1 is started from the head. In addition, during the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect is ended in response to the player holding the handle 20 (or in response to turning the lever 21), and the decorative design 51 is stopped in the liquid crystal display device 5. While the displayed image is displayed, the reproduction of BGM 1 may be started.

  In this way, when the reproduction of BGM1 is started in response to the start of variation of the special symbol, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output during the variation of the special symbol. Further, even after the special symbol is stopped, BGM1 is continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses. In the case where there are a plurality of special symbol determination suspensions, when the loss variation pattern is selected, the special symbol is varied and stopped repeatedly. The BGM 1 is continuously reproduced and output while the special symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped. When the playback of BGM1 ends (when the playback position of BGM1 reaches the end), BGM1 starts to play again from the beginning.

  The horizontal arrow of BGM1 in FIG. 19 indicates that the reproduction and output of BGM1 are continued while a plurality of special symbols are changed. BGM1 having a reproduction time shorter than a period in which a plurality of special symbols are changed may be reproduced repeatedly. Further, BGM1 having a reproduction time longer than this period may be reproduced and output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of songs (for example, eight songs A to H) are stored as songs of a specific singer. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), there are eight effect modes (stages), and any one of the eight effect modes is selected, and the variable effect is generated in any effect mode. Is done. For example, if the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times after the production mode changes, the production control unit 130 determines whether to change the production mode at the start of the next special symbol variation, and determines that the production mode is to be changed. In the case where it is done, any of the eight production modes is selected by lottery. A different background image is displayed for each effect mode (stage), and different types of music are output while the special symbol is changing. That is, the type of the BGM 1 output during the variation of the special symbol based on the loss variation pattern is different for each effect mode. For example, in the production mode A (stage A), the background image A for stage A is displayed, and BGM_A1 is reproduced and output as a part of the music piece A in this stage A. Further, when the effect mode A (stage A) is switched to the effect mode B (stage B), the background image B for the stage B is displayed, and BGM_B1 is reproduced as a part of the music B at the stage B. Is output. Further, in the probability variation gaming state, there is an effect mode (stage in the probability variation mode) in the probability variation game state, a different background image is displayed for each effect mode, and different types of music are output during the variation of the special symbol.

  In addition, when the reach effect is performed during the special symbol change and the game is lost, in the next special symbol change, the playback position (elapsed time from the beginning) of the BGM1 in the last special symbol change is halfway. Even if it exists, BGM1 may be reproduced | regenerated from the head. Further, when the special symbol variation based on the loss variation pattern is repeatedly performed, the BGM 1 may be reproduced from the beginning for each special symbol variation.

  Here, the composition of the music will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the composition of music used in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the music is composed of, for example, five parts BGM 1 to 5. Each musical piece is divided into, for example, five parts as shown in FIG. For example, the music piece A is divided into BGM_A1, BGM_A2, BGM_A3, BGM_A4, and BGM_A5. The music B is divided into BGM_B1, BGM_B2, BGM_B3, BGM_B4, and BGM_B5. The music piece C is also divided into BGM_C1 to C5. Below, among the five parts of each song, the first part is “BGM1”, the second part is “BGM2”, the third part is “BGM3”, the fourth part is “BGM4”, the fifth part Is expressed as “BGM5”.

  For example, BGM1 may be an introduction part (prelude part) of specific music. BGM1 may be music that repeats the same or similar rhythm. This BGM1 is repeatedly output while the effect based on the loss variation pattern shown in FIG. 19 is being performed. Although details will be described later, this BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect.

  BGM2 is a part of specific music following BGM1. For example, BGM2 may be a portion that follows a prelude portion of a specific music piece. BGM2 may be played from the end of BGM1, or BGM2 may be played from the middle of BGM1. Since BGM1 is a repetition of a predetermined rhythm, even if BGM2 is reproduced from the end of BGM1 or BGM2 is reproduced from the middle of BGM1, there is no sense of incongruity. Note that BGM1 and BGM2 do not necessarily have such a configuration. BGM1 may not be a repetition of a predetermined rhythm. Although details will be described later, this BGM2 is output during N reach production.

  BGM3 is a part of specific music following BGM2. For example, BGM3 may be a melody portion of a specific music piece. Although details will be described later, this BGM3 is output during the SP reach production.

  BGM4 is a part of specific music following BGM3. For example, the BGM 4 may be a rust portion of a specific music piece. The BGM 4 has a predetermined playback time, and the playback time varies depending on the type of music (for example, 45 seconds, 55 seconds, 65 seconds, etc.). Although details will be described later, this BGM4 is output during the SPSP reach production.

  BGM5 is a part of specific music following BGM4. For example, BGM5 may be the last chorus part of a specific music piece.

  The music piece is not limited to five parts, but may be divided into six or more parts, or may be divided into four or less parts.

(Direction by jackpot variation pattern or reach variation pattern)
Next, an effect when the jackpot variation pattern or the reach variation pattern is selected will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of special symbols and the flow of variation when the jackpot variation pattern or reach variation pattern is selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (1), when any of the fluctuation patterns OP1-1, OP1-2 (FIG. 18A), fluctuation patterns HP1-1, HP1-2 (FIG. 18B) is selected, N Variation production including reach production is performed. Specifically, the pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of the change of the special symbol. The pre-reach effect is an effect before the reach effect is performed. In this pre-reach effect, for example, a start effect in which the decorative symbol 51 starts to fluctuate, a notice effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, or a pseudo variable effect in which the decorative symbol 51 is changed again is performed. Or you may. After the pre-reach effect is performed, the reach is established and the N reach effect (A or B) is performed. As a result of the N reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three similar decorative symbols are arranged is performed. In addition, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect in which the same three types of decorative symbols are not aligned is performed. And, according to the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (a mode in which three similar types of decorative symbols are aligned) or a lost mode (a mode in which the same three types of decorative symbols are not aligned) ( Stop this).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (2), when any of the fluctuation patterns OP2-1 to OP2-3 (FIG. 18A) and the fluctuation patterns HP2-1 to HP2-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected, the SP Variation production including reach production is performed. Specifically, the pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of the change of the special symbol, and then the N reach effect (A or B) is performed. In the final stage of the N reach effect, an SP development effect indicating that the SP reach effect is developed, and the SP reach effect (any of A to C) is started. As a result of the SP reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three similar decorative symbols are arranged is performed. In addition, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect in which the same three types of decorative symbols are not aligned is performed. Then, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed according to the special symbol stop display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), when any one of the fluctuation patterns OP3-1 to OP3-3 (FIG. 18A) and the fluctuation patterns HP3-1 to HP3-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected. , Fluctuation effects including SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects are performed. Specifically, the pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of the change of the special symbol, and then the N reach effect (A or B) is performed. In the final stage of the N reach effect, an SP development effect indicating that the SP reach effect is developed, and the SP reach effect (any of A to C) is started. Next, in the final stage of the SP reach production, the SPSP development production indicating that the SPSP reach production is further developed is performed, and the SPSP reach production (any of A to C) is started. As a result of the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three similar decorative symbols are arranged is performed. In addition, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect in which the same three types of decorative symbols are not aligned is performed. Then, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed according to the special symbol stop display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), when any one of the fluctuation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 (FIG. 18A) and the fluctuation patterns HP4-1 to HP4-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected. Fluctuation effects including SPSP reach effects are performed. Specifically, the pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of the change of the special symbol, and then the N reach effect (A or B) is performed. In the final stage of the N reach production, the SPSP development production indicating that the development will be the SPSP reach production is performed, and the SPSP reach production (any of A to C) is started. As a result of the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three similar decorative symbols are arranged is performed. In addition, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect in which the same three types of decorative symbols are not aligned is performed. Then, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed according to the special symbol stop display. Note that the SPSP development effect that suggests the development from the N reach production to the SPSP reach production in FIG. 22 (4) is the same as the SPSP development production that suggests the development from the SP reach production to the SPSP reach production in FIG. 22 (3). It may be an effect or a different effect.

(Reach production and BGM control)
Next, a description will be given of BGM control and a specific effect example when effects according to the effect patterns shown in FIG. 22 are performed. The control of BGM during reach production will be described.

((Control of BGM in the production pattern of FIG. 22 (1)))
FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when an N reach effect is performed. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the effect by the effect pattern of FIG. 23 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of variation of the special symbol at time T0. Specifically, as the pre-reach effect, as shown in FIG. 24A, the three decorative symbols 51 start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed (FIG. 24B). Thereafter, the left decorative design 51a slowly moves from the upper direction of the screen and temporarily stops in the left area (FIG. 24C), and then the right decorative design 51c of the same type as the left decorative design 51a It moves slowly from the direction and temporarily stops in the right area (FIG. 24D).

  In the pre-reach effect, BGM1 is output from the speaker 24. That is, during the pre-reach production, as described with reference to FIG. 19, the same BGM 1 as when the production with the loss variation pattern is performed is continuously output. In the pre-reach effect, a pseudo-variable effect may be performed as described above.

  When the right decorative design 51c of the same type as the left decorative design 51a is temporarily stopped, reach is established (time point T1 in FIG. 23, FIG. 24E). When the reach is established, a reach establishment sound indicating that the reach is established is output from the speaker 24. As shown in FIG. 23, the BGM 1 stops almost simultaneously with the output of the reach establishment sound. While the reach establishment sound is being output, neither BGM1 nor BGM2 is output. Further, when reach is established, a linear image connecting the three decorative symbols 51 indicating that reach has been established is displayed. When reach is established, for example, a character image “reach!” May be displayed (FIG. 24E).

  After reach is established, N reach production is performed (FIG. 24F). When the N reach effect is performed, BGM2 is output. For example, after the output of the reach establishment sound is completed, the output of BGM2 is started. Note that the BGM2 may start outputting while the reach establishment sound is being output. For example, simultaneously with the start of the reach establishment sound, the BGM1 may stop and the output of the BGM2 may start. Alternatively, BGM1 may stop first, reach establishment sound may be output in response to reach establishment (display of a linear image in FIG. 24E), and BGM2 may be started to output while reach establishment sound is being output. . In this case, control may be performed so that the volume of the BGM 2 gradually increases. For example, the output of BGM2 is started at a relatively low volume during the output of the reach establishment sound, the volume of BGM2 is gradually increased until the output of the reach formation sound is finished, and the volume of BGM2 is normally set at the end of the output of the reach establishment sound. The normal volume may be maintained during the subsequent N reach production.

  N reach production is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the reach is established. During the N reach production, a normal background image is displayed as a background image, and a state in which the medium decorative design 51b fluctuates is displayed. For example, there is an effect in which the middle decorative pattern 51b moves slowly from the upper part of the screen, and the middle region is expected to stop the same type of decorative pattern as the left and right. During this time, as shown in FIG. 23, BGM2 is continuously output.

  When the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the middle decorative symbol 51b different from the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped in the middle region at time T2, and the loss is notified (FIG. 24G). BGM2 stops almost at the same time as this middle decorative pattern 51b stops in the middle region (T2 in FIG. 23B).

  When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, at the time T2, the same type of middle decorative symbols 51b as the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle region, and a big hit is notified (not shown). When the medium decorative design 51b is temporarily stopped in the middle region, BGM2 stops almost simultaneously (T2 in FIG. 23A). The probability that the jackpot notification effect is performed from the N reach effect is extremely low, for example, 1/1000 or less. When the jackpot notification effect is performed, after the middle decorative pattern 51b of the same type as the left and right decorative patterns is temporarily stopped in the middle region, the decorative pattern is highlighted in a state where three similar decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped (Zoro eyes). Is done. For example, three decorative symbols 51 shine or effects are applied to the three decorative symbols 51 as a highlight display of the decorative symbols. Then, after the decorative symbols are highlighted, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), and then the three decorative symbols 51 are displayed in accordance with the stoppage of the special symbols. Stop.

  When the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the three decorative symbols 51 remain temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, one second) after the middle decorative symbol 51b different from the left and right decorative symbols stops. If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the decorative symbol is not highlighted. Thereafter, the three decorative symbols 51 are fully stopped in response to the special symbol stop display (FIG. 24H). During this time, BGM2 remains stopped.

  When there is a special symbol determination suspension, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the next special symbol starts to change. . At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. In addition, when there is no suspension of the special symbol determination right, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol changes. In this case as well, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning.

  That is, when a loss notification is made without a reach effect, as described above, BGM1 is continuously output even during the special symbol stop display period, and from the beginning of BGM1 at the start of the next special symbol change. The reproduction of the next special symbol is started at a position in the middle of BGM 1 (position from the beginning to the end of the reproduction time) without starting reproduction. On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified, the reproduction starts from the top of the BGM 1 at the start of the next special symbol change.

  Note that the BGM1 may start to be output while the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped after the middle decorative symbol 51b temporarily stops at the time point T2. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. In addition, when BGM1 is output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51, BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time T1.

((Control of BGM in the production pattern of FIG. 22 (2)))
Next, BGM control when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 25A shows an effect pattern when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and FIG. 25B shows an effect pattern when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. Moreover, FIG. 26 is a figure which shows an example of a screen figure in case SP reach production is performed from N reach production. FIG. 27 is an example of a screen diagram subsequent to FIG. 26, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen diagram in a case where the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot.

  Similarly to FIG. 23, the special symbol starts to fluctuate at time T0, the pre-reach effect is performed, and reach is established at time T1 (FIGS. 25 and 26A to 26E). Note that the pseudo-variation effect may be performed a predetermined number of times before reach is established. When reach is established, N reach production is performed. Note that the pseudo-variation effect may be performed before the reach is established, or the pseudo-change effect is performed during the N reach effect after the reach is established, and the reach may be established again. For example, after a different type (or the same type) of decorative symbols on the left and right is temporarily stopped, a “NEXT” symbol (a pseudo-continuous symbol indicating a pseudo-variable effect) indicating that a pseudo-variable effect is performed is temporarily set as a medium decorative symbol 51b. After the stop, a pseudo-variation effect in which the three decorative symbols 51 are re-variable may be performed. When the pseudo variation effect is performed, the BGM 1 may be continuously output, or may be output from the head of the BGM 1 every time the pseudo variation is started, or while the pseudo variation effect is being performed, the pseudo variation effect is performed. A BGM for variation production may be output.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when a pseudo-variable effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 29A, every time a pseudo-variable effect is performed, playback may start from the top of BGM1. For example, when three pseudo fluctuations are performed (when the “NEXT” symbol is stopped twice and re-variation is performed twice), the special symbol is reproduced from the beginning of BGM1 at the variation start time T0, and the pseudo 1 A pseudo-variation is made. Next, the “NEXT” symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region, and a pseudo 2 pseudo variation is performed. When the “NEXT” symbol stops, the BGM 1 being reproduced stops and a pseudo-variation effect sound indicating a pseudo-variation effect is output. It should be noted that the timing at which the BGM 1 being reproduced stops is not the timing at which the “NEXT” symbol stops, but may be the timing at which the pseudo 2 pseudo fluctuation starts after the “NEXT” symbol stops. BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning in response to the start of pseudo-2 pseudo fluctuation. That is, the BGM1 being reproduced is stopped halfway when the pseudo 1 pseudo variation ends, and the BGM 1 is reproduced from the beginning in response to the start of the pseudo 2 pseudo variation. Furthermore, the “NEXT” symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region, and a pseudo 3 pseudo variation is performed. In response to the start of the pseudo 3 pseudo variation, the BGM 1 is reproduced from the head.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29B, when the pseudo variation effect is performed, the BGM 1 may be reproduced so as to straddle the start time of each pseudo variation. For example, when pseudo 1, pseudo 2, and pseudo 3 are performed between time points T0 and T1, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning at the start time T0 of pseudo 1, pseudo 2 is started at a position in the middle of BGM1, and thereafter , Pseudo 3 may be started at a position in the middle of BGM1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29C, in the case where a pseudo variation effect is performed, BGM1 is output in the pseudo variation of pseudo 1, and when the “NEXT” symbol stops in the middle region, BGM1 stops and pseudo variation Production sound is output. It should be noted that the timing at which the BGM 1 being reproduced stops is not the timing at which the “NEXT” symbol stops, but may be the timing at which the pseudo 2 pseudo fluctuation starts after the “NEXT” symbol stops. When the pseudo variation of the pseudo 2 is started, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo ream is reproduced from the head. Further, when the pseudo 3 pseudo variation is started, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo ream may be reproduced from the head thereof. Moreover, BGM only for pseudo | simulation continuations may be output so that the pseudo | simulation 3 pseudo fluctuation start time may be straddled. That is, BGM1 is output in the pseudo 1 pseudo variation, and the pseudo-BGM dedicated BGM is played back from the beginning in response to the start of the pseudo 2 pseudo variation. Three pseudo-variations may be initiated.

  25 and 26, as in FIG. 23, during the pre-reach production, BGM1 is output. When the reach is established, a reach establishment sound is output and BGM1 is stopped, and BGM2 is displayed in response to the start of the N reach production. Is output (FIG. 25). During the N reach production, as in FIG. 23, the middle decoration symbol 51b slowly moves from the upper part of the screen, and an effect is made to expect the same type of decoration symbol as the left and right to stop (FIG. 26 (F)). .

  In the final stage of the N reach effect, for example, an effect as if a decorative pattern (“7” symbol) different from the left and right decorative symbols slowly moves downward from above and stops in the middle region is performed. Then, the “7” symbol does not stop (or temporarily stops) in the middle region, and an effect of passing through the middle region is performed (time point T2 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (G)). Then, an SP development effect that suggests development to an SP reach effect is performed (time points T2 to T3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (H)). When the SP development effect is started, SP development sound is output.

  In the SP development effect, for example, the left decorative design 51a moves to the upper left of the screen while reducing, and the right decorative design 51c moves to the upper right of the screen while reducing (FIG. 26 (H)). At this time, the character image as a part of the left decorative pattern 51a is separated from the numerical image, and only the numerical image is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The same applies to the right decorative design 51c. Thus, when developing from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect, the decorative property (size, presence / absence of character) of the decorative pattern 51 is lowered. In the SP development effect, a background switching effect in which the background image is switched is performed. Specifically, the SP background image for SP reach production is switched from the normal background image. During the SP reach production, the SP background image is displayed as the background image.

  Here, the display mode of the decorative design during each production will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of decorative symbols during each effect. As shown in FIG. 30, during the special symbol stop display, each decorative symbol 51 is displayed in a form including a numeric image (for example, “1” to “9”) and a character image (or a photograph of a person). When the change of the special symbol is started, a state in which the relatively large decorative design including the number image and the character image starts to change is displayed. Further, even during the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect, a relatively large decorative design including a numeric image and a character image is displayed. When a jackpot or loss is notified as a result of the N reach effect, three relatively large decorative symbols including a numeric image and a character image are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols are displayed according to the stop of the special symbol. Stop this. On the other hand, during the SP reach production, a relatively small decorative design that includes a numeric image and does not include a character image is displayed (see FIG. 27I). In addition, a relatively small decorative design that includes a numeric image and does not include a character image is displayed during the SPSP reach production. In addition, in the case of a big hit or a loss through the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production, a relatively large decorative design including a number image and a character image is displayed when the three decorative designs are temporarily stopped. At the time of stop display, the three decorative symbols are fully stopped (see FIGS. 27 (M) (N) and 28 (L) (M)). In the case of a big hit through the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, a relatively large decorative design that includes a numeric image but no character image is displayed when the three decorative designs are temporarily stopped, and the special design is stopped. When the three decorative symbols (a relatively large decorative symbol that includes a numeric image and does not include a character image) are stopped at the time of display while the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is lost, When the symbol is temporarily stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol including a numeric image and a character image is displayed. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols (relatively large decorative symbols including a numerical image and a character image) are displayed. May be stopped.

  Here, the decorative design in the form including the numeric image and the character image is referred to as the “first decorative pattern”, and the decorative design in the form including the numeric image and not including the character image is “the second decorative pattern”. Call it.

  In addition, when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state, for example, the decorative symbol of the second mode is variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed second special symbol. Specifically, before the reach, which is the production period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative symbols until the reach is established, a decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the second aspect) in which no character is added to a large number is displayed. Is done. The same applies to the winning notification when the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped as the second special symbol is stopped.

  Further, when the reach is established in the probability variation gaming state, the battle reach effect in which the player character and the enemy character fight without performing the N reach effect as in the normal gaming state is performed. During the battle reach effect in the probability-changing gaming state, a relatively small second-style decoration pattern is displayed as in the SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal gaming state.

  Returning to FIG. 25, in the SP development effect, the SP development sound suggesting the SP development effect is output, and the BGM2 is stopped together with the output of the SP development sound. Note that during the SP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect will be developed, BGM2 is continuously output, and the SP development sound may not be output. Further, during the SP development effect, BGM2 and SP development sound may be output.

  Next, the SP reach effect is started, and the reproduction of the BGM 3 is started (time T3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 27 (I)). That is, playback is started from the beginning of the BGM 3 at the timing when the SP reach effect is started. The BGM 3 has a predetermined playback time, and this playback time is substantially equal to the SP reach production time. Note that the timing at which the output of the BGM 3 is started may be during the SP development effect. For example, the output of the BGM 3 may be started at the timing when the SP development effect starts. Further, the output of the BGM 3 may be started during the SP development effect after the SP development effect is started. For example, during the SP development effect, the SP development sound suggesting the development to the SP reach production may be output, and the output of the BGM 3 may be started at the timing when the output of the SP development sound ends. Further, the output of the BGM 3 may be started during the output of the SP developed sound. At this time, the volume of the BGM 3 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, BGM3 is output at a volume lower than normal during output of SP developed sound, BGM3 becomes normal volume at the timing when output of SP developed sound ends, and then BGM3 at normal volume during SP reach production. May be output. Further, at the timing when the SP reach effect is started (T3 in FIG. 25), the output of BGM2 may be completed and the output of BGM3 may be started.

  The type of music of BGM3 output during SP reach production is determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, BGM_A1 is output in accordance with the stage (effect mode) during the pre-reach effect in the change effect according to the change pattern, and the change pattern during the SP reach effect. In response to this, BGM_B3 may be output. Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, in the variation production according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (production mode) during the pre-reach production, and during the SP reach production In response to this, BGM_C3 may be output. Further, the type of musical piece during the pre-reach effect and the N-reach effect may be determined according to the special symbol variation pattern.

  Note that the type of BGM3 music that is output during the SP reach production may differ depending on the stage (production mode). For example, when an effect is being performed at stage A, BGM_A1 of song A may be output during the pre-reach effect, BGM_A2 may be output during the N reach effect, and BGM_A3 may be output during the SP reach effect. . Also, for example, when stage B is being staged, BGM_B1 of music B is output during stage before reach, BGM_B2 is output during stage N, and BGM_B3 is output during stage SP. Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 27, during the SP reach production, the SP reach animation production is performed in the central area of the screen, and the production that expects that the same type of decorative design as the left and right stops in the central area of the screen is performed. (FIG. 27 (J)). For example, in the SP reach animation effect, a state in which a predetermined 2D animation character performs a predetermined operation is displayed, and a state in which a decorative pattern fluctuates in the center area of the screen is displayed. BGM3 is output during the SP reach production so as to synchronize with this video production. For example, if an anime character achieves a predetermined mission or not, and if the anime character achieves a predetermined mission, the three similar types of decorative symbols stop and become a big hit, achieving the predetermined mission. If there is not, the decorative pattern of a different type from the left and right stops in the middle area and loses. During the SP reach production, the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 are not displayed. Note that the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed during the SP reach effect, the holding display 52 may be hidden, the changing display 53 may be displayed, or the changing display 53. May be hidden and the hold display 52 may be displayed.

  If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the jackpot notification effect is performed when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effect (time T4 in FIG. 25A, FIG. 27). (K)). Specifically, “8” symbols of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 51b.

  When the medium decorative design 51b stops, the BGM 3 stops and a jackpot notification sound is output (FIG. 25 (A)). For example, the BGM 3 may stop and a jackpot notification sound may be output at the timing when the medium decorative design 51b stops. Also, the BGM 3 stops immediately before the middle decorative symbol 51b stops (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and the jackpot notification sound is output simultaneously with the middle decorative symbol 51b stopping (or immediately after the middle decorative symbol 51b stops). May be.

  After the middle decorative symbol 51b stops, the jackpot notification effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) (FIG. 27 (L)). For example, during the jackpot notification effect, a state in which the animation character has achieved a predetermined mission is displayed, or a character image indicating the jackpot is displayed. Moreover, the movable accessory 7 may operate. Further, during the jackpot notification effect, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may emit light in a mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating a jackpot.

  Then, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped at a relatively large position in the center of the screen (FIG. 27M), and then the three decorative symbols 51 are finally stopped according to the special symbol stop display (FIG. 27N )). Specifically, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 27M), and the decorative symbols are highlighted (for example, the three decorative symbols 51 are illuminated or the three decorative symbols 51 are affected). 3), the three decorative symbols 51 remain temporarily stopped for a predetermined period after the highlighting of the decorative symbols is finished, and thereafter, the three decorative symbols 51 are fully stopped in response to the stoppage of the special symbols (see FIG. 27 (N)). When the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped and permanently stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol 51 (decorative symbol of the first aspect) including a numeric image and a character image is displayed (FIGS. 27M and N). . Then, after the opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is performed, the jackpot game is started.

  Here, the emphasis display of the decorative design will be described. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the decorative symbols of the three first forms forming the double-tipped eyes temporarily stop, the “first reflection effect” is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). . The “first reflection effect” is an effect in which highlight light such as metallic luster is added to each decorative design, and an effect sound such as “Pichan!” Is output from the speaker 24. In the first reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added to the middle symbol and the right symbol at the same time as highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left symbol. As a result, the light radiated to the decorative design can appear as if it is specularly reflected from the front of the decorative design, and three similar decorative designs can be emphasized as if they had a metallic luster. I can emphasize more.

  In the present embodiment, the first reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative pattern of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative pattern of the second aspect.

  After the decorative symbols of the three first aspects forming the double-faced eyes are temporarily stopped, the promotion effect may be performed without performing the first reflection effect (or after the first reflection effect is performed). . The promotion effect is an effect that, for example, is expected to change the three decorative patterns of the first aspect that form “888” double eyes to the three decorative patterns that form “777” double eyes. The “77” and “333” double eyes, for example, indicate a 10R probability variation jackpot, and the even number such as “888”, for example, indicates a 4R normal jackpot, for example, an odd number such as “111” (“777” and The odd-numbered eyes (odd symbols excluding “333”) indicate 4R probability variation jackpots. An effect that changes from a doublet such as “888” indicating a normal jackpot to a “777” or “111” doublet indicating a promising jackpot is referred to as a successful promotion. On the other hand, an effect that does not change from a doublet such as “888” indicating a normal jackpot to a doublet indicating a probable jackpot is referred to as a promotion failure production.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the promotion failure effect or the promotion success effect is started, the “second reflection effect” is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). The “second reflection effect” is, for example, adding highlight light to each decorative pattern in the same way as the first reflection effect, and the character lines (for example, “the time is full”) attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. Is output from the speaker 24. In the second reflection effect, for example, highlight light is applied from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers constituting the left symbol, and at the same time, the numbers constituting the middle symbol and the right symbol are similarly highlighted. Add light. As described above, the second reflection effect is the first in which highlight light is attached to the entire decorative pattern in that highlight light is attached to the numbers but no highlight light is attached to the character. It is different from reflection production. This makes it possible to emphasize the decorative pattern of the pattern-aligned form to be stopped from now on without reducing the visibility of the character that emits the above-mentioned lines.

  In the present embodiment, the second reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative pattern of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative pattern of the second aspect.

  In the present embodiment, the stop display timing of the first special symbol comes when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses from the end of the second reflection effect. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative symbol starts the actual stop when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the second reflection effect. By providing a predetermined time between the second reflection effect and the main stop, for example, it is possible to prevent an image dropout in the second reflection effect from affecting the main stop.

  Note that the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect until the decorative symbol is fully stopped may be different or the same depending on the gaming state. Moreover, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect until the decoration symbol is stopped may be different or the same depending on the type of jackpot. Moreover, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect until the decoration symbol is completely stopped may be different depending on the type of the decoration symbol constituting the doublet. When a decorative symbol (for example, “777”) indicating a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player is stopped, a decorative symbol (for example, “888”) indicating a jackpot that is relatively not advantageous to the player is stopped. Rather, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the actual stop may be longer or shorter.

  FIG. 28 is an example of a screen diagram subsequent to FIG. 26, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

  As shown in FIG. 28, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effect (FIG. 25B). At time T4 in FIG. 28 (K)). Specifically, a decorative symbol of a different type from the left and right decorative symbols (for example, “7” symbol) is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 51b. When the middle decorative pattern 51b stops, the BGM 3 stops (FIG. 25B). For example, the BGM 3 may stop and the reach loss notification sound may be output at the timing when the medium decorative design 51b stops. The BGM 3 stops immediately before the middle decorative symbol 51b stops (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and at the same time as the middle decorative symbol 51b stops (or immediately after the middle decorative symbol 51b stops), a reach loss notification sound is output. May be.

  Then, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped in the center of the screen in a lost manner (FIG. 28 (L)). The three decorative symbols 51 are finally stopped (FIG. 28 (M)). When the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped and permanently stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol 51 including a numeric image and a character image is displayed.

  When there is a special symbol determination suspension, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the next special symbol starts to change. . At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. In addition, when there is no suspension of the special symbol determination right, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol changes. In this case as well, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. Note that BGM1 may be played back from a position (elapsed time from the beginning) at time T1 in FIG.

  Note that the BGM1 may start to be output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51 after the middle decorative symbol 51b has stopped at the time T4 shown in FIG. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. In another form, when BGM1 is output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51, BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time T1 in FIG.

  In FIGS. 25 (A) and 25 (B), the special symbol is stopped at the same time T5 in the case of big hit and lost, but in actuality, the variation time of the special symbol is better in the case of big hit. Is long. Therefore, the timing at time T5 in the jackpot pattern in FIG. 25A is later than the timing at time T5 in the loss pattern in FIG. 25B, and the jackpot notification effect has a longer time than the reach loss notification effect. long.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, different BGMs are output before reach, during N reach, and during SP reach. As described above, before the reach, during the N reach, and during the SP reach, the decorative symbols have different aspects. For this reason, it can be said that the aspect of a decorative design and BGM are mutually related. Specifically, BGM1 is output when a relatively large decorative pattern of the first aspect (decorative pattern including a numeric image and a character image) is displayed at high speed (FIGS. 26A to 26C). ), BGM1 stops when the two relatively large decorative patterns of the first aspect stop in the left and right regions (FIG. 26E). BGM2 is output when the two relatively large decorative patterns of the first aspect are stopped in the left and right areas and the relatively large decorative pattern of the first aspect is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed in the middle area. (FIGS. 26 (F) to (G)). In the process in which the relatively large decorative pattern of the first aspect changes to the relatively small decorative pattern of the second aspect, BGM2 is stopped and SP development sound is output (FIG. 26 (H)). The two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect stop at the left and right ends of the screen (positions on the left and right sides of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol before the reach), and a relatively large 1 BGM3 is output when the decorative patterns of the two second modes are changing in the middle area of the screen (FIGS. 27I to 27J).

(Control of BGM in the effect pattern of FIG. 22 (3))
Next, the control of the BGM in the case of developing to the SP reach effect after the N reach effect is performed and further developing to the SPSP reach effect will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control in the case of further development from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen diagram after the SP reach effect is started. FIG. 33 is an example of an effect following FIG. 32 (H), and shows an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot.

  In FIG. 31, portions different from FIG. 25 will be described, and description of portions similar to FIG. 25 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect are performed in sequence, the SP development effect is performed, and the SP reach effect is started (T0 to T3 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32 (A)).

  Next, in the middle or at the end of the SP reach production, an SPSP development effect that suggests development to the SPSP reach production is performed (T4 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32B). For example, in the center area of the screen, the SPSP development suggestion symbol that suggests development to SPSP reach production is stopped as the medium decoration symbol 51b, or a state where a predetermined animation character grabs the SPSP development suggestion symbol is displayed. May be. In addition, the movable accessory 7 may operate together with the stop of the SPSP development suggestion symbol.

  Subsequently, an image indicating the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed is displayed as the SPSP development effect (FIG. 32C). For example, when SPSP reach production A is executed, SPSP development image A is displayed, and when SPSP reach production B is executed, SPSP development image B is displayed and SPSP reach production C is executed. , SPSP development image C is displayed. For example, a title display indicating the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed is displayed as the SPSP development effect. When this title display is displayed, a sound corresponding to the title display may be output. For example, when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (for example, OP3-3) is selected, a title display C indicating the SPSP reach effect C is displayed, and the SPSP reach effect C having a relatively high expectation is executed. The When a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (for example, OP3-1) is selected, the title display A indicating the SPSP reach effect A is displayed, and the SPSP reach effect A with a relatively low expectation is executed. The Here, the title display may be the title of the music.

  In the SPSP development effect, a switching image indicating switching to the SPSP reach effect is displayed (FIG. 32D). For example, an image that closes the left and right door images may be displayed as the switching image. Note that a blackout effect (also referred to as a darkening effect) may be performed after the image in FIG. 32B is displayed until the image in FIG. 32D is displayed. For example, after the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production stops, the blackout production may be performed, and then the title display of FIG. 32C may be displayed. Here, the blackout effect (darkening effect) is an effect of darkening the entire screen by displaying a relatively dark image from a state in which a relatively bright image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and a background image or This is an effect (an effect of dark display) that makes the decorative symbol 51, other notice images, etc. difficult to view or not visible (concealed). For example, in the blackout effect, by placing a black image or a relatively dark gray image on the entire screen on the background image or the layer on the front side of the decorative pattern 51, the entire screen is covered with a dark image and the entire screen is darkened. It is an effect to do. Here, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the screen is managed by a plurality of layers. For example, the background image is arranged in the innermost layer (the layer with the lowest priority), and the decorative design 51 is arranged in the foremost layer (high priority layer). When these multiple layers are displayed on the screen, the foreground layer image is displayed and the foreground layer image is foreground Hidden in the image of the layer is not visible. For this reason, when a black image is arranged in the frontmost layer, the image in the innermost layer is hidden by the black image, and as a result, the entire screen is covered with a black image, and other images cannot be seen. Alternatively, a black image with a predetermined transparency may be arranged on the frontmost layer so that it is difficult to visually recognize the image on the back layer. A blackout effect may be performed by such a method. In the blackout effect, the background image may be replaced with a black image or a relatively dark gray image. Further, in the blackout effect, the black image is arranged in a layer between the background image and the decorative design 51 to darken the background image (concealment), while the decorative design 51 is not darkly displayed (relatively bright). (It may be displayed as an image). Further, as a blackout effect, in addition to (or instead of) the effect of dark-displaying the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, an effect of turning off the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 or reducing the light amount thereof may be performed. . Further, the blackout effect may be performed before the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is stopped, and then the SPSP development suggestion symbol of FIG. 32 (B) may be stopped. Further, a blackout effect may be performed after the title display is displayed.

  At the time T4 when the SPSP development effect is started, the output of the BGM 3 is stopped. For example, an SPSP development sound that suggests development to SPSP reach production may be output at the timing when the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped, and the BGM 3 may stop simultaneously with the output of the SPSP development sound. Further, the BGM 3 may be stopped immediately before the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped (for example, 0.5 seconds before). Further, the BGM 3 may be stopped after the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped. Further, a blackout effect may be performed at time T4, and BGM3 may be stopped in response to the start of the blackout effect. When the blackout effect ends, an effect indicating that the SPSP reach effect is performed (for example, a title display indicating the type of the SPSP reach effect and a sound indicating that the SPSP reach effect is performed) may be performed.

  During the blackout production, a sound restriction state in which sound output is restricted may be set. Here, the sound restriction state is a silent state where no sound is output, or a state where a relatively loud sound is not output and only a relatively small sound is output. BGM is not output in the sound restriction state. Even when the sound restriction state is set during the blackout effect, if the gaming machine 1 detects an error, an error sound is output. For example, when the gaming machine 1 detects fraud (for example, when magnetism is detected or when the game machine 1 is turned to the left when it should be left-handed), or when it is detected that the lower pan is full Error sound is output according to the detected content. In addition, when there is a winning at the start of the game ball in the sound restricted state, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the winning may not be output or may be output. In addition, when there is a winning at the game ball start opening in the sound restricted state, depending on the expectation of jackpot for the special symbol determination related to winning, there are cases where the winning sound is output or not output Also good.

  In addition, when the SPSP reach production C having a relatively high expectation is executed, the blackout effect is performed during the execution of the SPSP development effect and the sound restriction state is easily set, and the SPSP reach production having a relatively low expectation is performed. When A is executed, the blackout effect may not be easily performed during the execution of the SPSP development effect. Further, when the SPSP reach effect C is executed, the blackout effect is executed with a probability of 100% during the execution of the SPSP development effect, and when the SPSP reach effect A is executed, the SPSP extension effect is executed. There is no need for a blackout effect.

  Then, after the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP reach effect is started (T5 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32E). The BGM 4 starts to be played in response to the start of the SPSP reach production. That is, playback is started from the beginning of the BGM 4 at the timing when the SPSP reach production is started. The BGM 4 has a predetermined playback time, and this playback time is substantially equal to the SPSP reach production effect time.

  Note that the timing at which the output of the BGM 4 is started may be during the SPSP development effect. For example, SPSP development sound suggesting development to SPSP reach production during SPSP development production (for example, sound effect outputted together with the image of FIG. 32B or sound outputted together with the title display of FIG. 32C) May be output and the output of the BGM 4 may be started at the timing when the SPSP development sound output ends. Further, the BGM 4 may start to be output during the output of the SPSP development sound. At this time, the volume of the BGM 4 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, BGM4 is output at a lower volume than usual during output of SPSP development sound, BGM4 becomes normal volume at the timing when output of SPSP development sound ends, and then BGM4 at normal volume during SPSP reach production. May be output. The normal volume of BGM4 during the SPSP reach production is larger than the normal volume of BGM3 (also BGM1 and 2). The normal volume of BGM4 may be the same as the normal volume of BGM3 (that is, the volume of BGM during the SP reach effect). Further, at the timing when the SPSP reach effect is started (T5 in FIG. 31), the output of BGM3 may be completed and the output of BGM4 may be started.

  The type of music of BGM4 output during the SPSP reach production is determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, in the variation production according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (production mode) during the pre-reach production, and during the SPSP reach production In response to this, BGM_B4 may be output. Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, in the variation production according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output in accordance with the stage (production aspect) during the pre-reach production, and during the SPSP reach production. In response to this, BGM_C4 may be output.

  As described above, the type of BGM1 during the pre-reach production varies depending on the production mode (stage) not depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol, while the BGM3 during the SP reach production and the BGM4 during the SPSP reach production are special. It may be different depending on the pattern variation pattern. In addition, the type of music during the N reach production may vary depending on the variation pattern, or may vary depending on the production mode. Further, the type of music during the N reach production may be fixed regardless of the variation pattern or the production mode. For example, during N-reach production, it is a fixed BGM (different BGM depending on the production mode, or the same BGM in any production mode) regardless of the variation pattern, while during SP reach production or SPSP reach production, it varies. BGM corresponding to the pattern may be output.

  For example, as described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect is performed in any of eight effect modes (stages) in the normal gaming state. At each stage, the type of BGM 1, the background image, and the like are different. At the same stage, the same type of BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect even if the special symbol variation patterns are different. On the other hand, for example, the type of BGM 4 during SPSP reach production varies depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the variation pattern OP3-1 is selected, BGM_A4 may be output during the SPSP reach production, and when the variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, BGM_B4 may be output during the SPSP reach production. Note that the type of music (music A to music H) may be determined according to the variation pattern, and the same type of music may be output from the beginning of the variation. In this case, the same type of music is output through the pre-reach effect, the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect, and each part of the same type of music is output according to each effect.

  Note that the type of music of BGM 4 output during the SPSP reach production may vary depending on the stage (production mode). For example, when an effect is being performed at stage A, BGM_A1 of song A is output during the pre-reach effect, BGM_A2 is output during the N reach effect, BGM_A3 is output during the SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect. Is started, BGM_A4 of music A may be output.

  In the SPSP reach animation effect of FIG. 32 (E), for example, a live-action image is displayed, and a state in which the decorative design fluctuates in the center area of the screen is displayed. For example, an effect of whether or not a person in the live-action video achieves a predetermined mission is performed. During the SPSP reach production, the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 are not displayed. During the SPSP reach effect, the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed, the hold display 52 may be hidden, the changing display 53 may be displayed, or the changing display 53 may be displayed. May be hidden and the hold display 52 may be displayed. In the SPSP reach effect, a state in which the middle decorative symbol 51b is changed is displayed, and an effect is made to cause the player to expect that the decorative symbol of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols stops as the middle decorative symbol 51b (see FIG. 32 (F)). For example, an effect is produced in which “8” symbols of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols and “7” symbols of different types are pressed against each other.

  Following FIG. 32 (F), BGM4 stops and the image on the screen stops momentarily (FIG. 32 (G)) immediately before the big hit notification effect at the end of SPSP reach is performed (for example, one second before). For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (F), the movement of the two decorative symbols gradually slows down from the state where the two decorative symbols are moving so as to push each other in the center area of the screen, and the movement of the two decorative symbols stops momentarily. To do. At this timing, the BGM 4 stops.

  When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, a big hit notification effect is performed at time T6 (T6 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32 (H)). Specifically, “8” symbols of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 51b, and the movable accessory 7 operates to advance to the vicinity of the center of the screen. The movable accessory 7 is usually stored between the game board 2 and the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and operates at the time of jackpot notification as shown in FIG. 32 (H) to advance to the vicinity of the center of the screen. It is configured as follows. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in a mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating a jackpot.

  After the jackpot notification effect is performed, the after-hit notification effect is performed (FIG. 33 (I)). In the post-hit notification effect, the movable accessory 7 that has advanced near the center of the screen is stored in the initial position (both sides of the screen), and a video in which a person in the live-action video has achieved a predetermined mission is displayed at the center of the screen. The

  Next, the screen is switched, and three similar decorative symbols 51 are displayed large in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (slightly changed) (FIG. 33J). Then, in response to the stop of the special symbol, three same-type decorative symbols 51 are permanently stopped (FIG. 33 (K)). Specifically, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 33 (J)), and the decorative symbols are highlighted (for example, the three decorative symbols 51 are lit or an effect is applied to the three decorative symbols 51). 3), the three decorative symbols 51 remain temporarily stopped for a predetermined period after the highlighting of the decorative symbols is finished, and thereafter, the three decorative symbols 51 are fully stopped in response to the stoppage of the special symbols (see FIG. 33 (K)). When these three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped and fully stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol including a numeric image and a character image is displayed. When the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped and fully stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol that includes a numeric image and does not include a character image may be displayed.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen diagram when the special symbol determination result is lost, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. 32 (F).

  As shown in FIG. 34, after an effect similar to that shown in FIG. 32G is performed, a reach-losing notification effect is performed at time T6 (T6 in FIG. 31B, FIG. 34H). Specifically, “7” symbols of a different type from the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 51b. Here, the movable accessory 7 does not operate as shown in FIG. Further, in the reach lose notification effect, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 do not emit light in a mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating a big hit. Then, the screen is switched, and three decorative symbols 51 (decorative symbols including a numeric image and a character image) are displayed in a large manner in the center of the screen in a lost manner, temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbols are not highlighted. In response to the stop of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 51 are permanently stopped (FIG. 34 (I)).

  Here, the details of the sound control after the SPSP reach production end stage will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of sound control after the end of the SPSP reach production in the case of big hit or loss.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (A), when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect is performed at time T6 after the SPSP reach effect is started and a predetermined time has elapsed. The BGM 4 stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect (for example, one second before the time T6). At time T6, the jackpot notification effect is started and a jackpot notification sound is output. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect indicating a jackpot and is larger than the volume of BGM4. In addition, an accessory effect in which the movable accessory 7 operates is also performed. After the big hit notification sound and the accessory effect are performed, the movable accessory 7 may be retracted to the initial position, and BGM5 following the BGM4 may be output. The BGM 5 may be, for example, the end of the chorus portion of the music (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). Thereafter, at time T7, the variation effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35B, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed at time T6 after the SPSP reach effect has started and a predetermined time has elapsed. The BGM 4 stops immediately before this reach lose notification effect (for example, one second before the time T6). At time T6, a reach loss notification effect is performed. In the reach loss notification effect, the jackpot notification sound is not output, and the reach loss notification sound is output. The volume of the reach notification sound is smaller than the jackpot notification sound. In the case of loss, BGM5 following BGM4 is not output.

  After the reach lose notification effect is performed, if there is a special symbol determination right hold, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. Variation starts. At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. In addition, when there is no suspension of the special symbol determination right, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol changes. In this case as well, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning.

  In addition, after the middle decorative symbol 51b stops at the time T6 shown in FIG. 34 (H), during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51 (that is, while the image shown in FIG. 34 (I) is displayed). , BGM1 may start outputting. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. When BGM1 is output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51, BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time T1 in FIG.

  In FIGS. 35A and 35B, it is assumed that the special symbol stops at the same time T7 in the case of jackpot and loss, but in actuality, the variation time of the special symbol is the case of jackpot. Is long. For this reason, the timing at time T7 in the jackpot pattern in FIG. 35A is later than the timing at time T7 in the loss pattern in FIG. 35B, and the jackpot notification effect has a longer time than the reach loss notification effect. long.

  Here, there is a difference between the timing at which the BGM 4 stops and the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed. For example, the BGM 4 stops one second before the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, the timing at which the BGM 3 during the SP reach effect is stopped is substantially the same as the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 31, even when the SP reach effect is developed to the SPSP reach effect, the timing at which the BGM 3 during the SP reach effect is stopped is substantially equal to the timing at which the SP development effect is performed.

  That is, the difference between the timing at which the BGM 4 during the SPSP reach effect stops and the timing at which the winning notification effect (the jackpot notification effect or reach loss notification effect) is executed is the same as the timing at which the BGM 3 during the SP reach effect stops and the winning notification effect ( This is larger than the difference from the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or reach loss notification effect) or SP development effect is executed. That is, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SPSP reach effect, the winning notification effect is performed after the first time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the BGM 4 stopped. On the other hand, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect, or when the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP reach effect, the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed almost simultaneously with the stop of the BGM 3.

  Note that the BGM 3 may stop immediately before the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed even when the winning notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect or when the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP reach effect. For example, the BGM 3 may stop 0.5 seconds before the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed. That is, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect, or when the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP reach effect, the second time (for example, 0 seconds or 0 shorter than the first time) After 5 seconds), the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect may be performed.

  In the above description, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the winning notification effect is started. However, the BGM 4 is stopped at the same time as the winning notification effect is started. Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 31 to FIG. 35, the decorative patterns and BGM are related to each other before reach, during N reach, during SP reach, and during SPSP reach. Specifically, from the start of fluctuation to a predetermined timing during SP reach is the same as the SP reach effect. In the middle or at the end of the SP reach, when the two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect stop at the left and right ends of the screen and the SPSP development suggestion symbol stops in the middle region, the BGM 3 stops (FIG. 32 ( B)). The SPSP development suggestion symbol is larger than the decorative symbol of the second aspect that is stopped to the left and right. After that, when the SPSP reach effect is started in a state where the two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect are stopped at the left and right ends of the screen, BGM4 is output (FIG. 32E). Here, the decorative pattern of the second aspect on the left and right in the SPSP reach may be the same size as the decorative pattern of the second aspect on the left and right in the SP reach, or may be a different size. For example, the decorative pattern of the left and right second modes in the SPSP reach may be smaller than the decorative pattern of the left and right second modes in the SP reach. Then, two relatively small decorative patterns of the second aspect stop at the left and right ends of the screen, and BGM4 stops immediately before the relatively large decorative pattern of the second aspect stops in the middle area of the screen. To do.

(Control of BGM in the effect pattern of FIG. 22 (4))
Next, the control of BGM when the SPSP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when the SPSP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 38 is an example of a screen diagram subsequent to FIG. 37, and shows an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of the change of the special symbol, and the N reach effect is performed (T0 to T1 in FIG. 36, FIGS. 37A to 37F). Specifically, during the pre-reach production, BGM1 is output, and BGM1 is stopped and a reach establishment sound is output in response to the reach establishment. And N reach production is started and BGM2 is output.

  Next, immediately before the time point T2, the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production slowly moves from the upper part to the lower part of the screen (FIG. 37 (G)). Then, the SPSP development suggestion symbol stops in the center area of the screen and the SPSP development effect is started (T2 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37 (H)). At this time, BGM2 stops and SPSP development sound suggesting development to SPSP reach production is output. If the SPSP development suggestion symbol does not stop in the center area of the screen, it does not develop into SPSP reach production.

  In the SPSP development effect, as described above, the left decorative design 51a moves to the upper left of the screen while being reduced, and the right decorative design 51c moves to the upper right of the screen while being reduced. At this time, the character image as a part of the left decorative pattern 51a is separated from the numerical image, and only the numerical image is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The same applies to the right decorative design 51c. Thus, when developing from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect, the decorativeness (size, presence / absence of character) of the decorative pattern 51 is lowered.

  In addition, in the SPSP development effect, the title is displayed (FIG. 38 (I)), and a switching image indicating switching to the SPSP reach effect is displayed in the same manner as in the case of developing from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect (FIG. 38 (I)). FIG. 38 (J)). Note that a blackout effect may be performed between the time when the screen in FIG. 37H is displayed and the time when the screen in FIG. 38J is displayed. For example, after the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production stops, the blackout production may be performed, and then the title display of FIG. 38 (I) may be displayed. Further, a blackout effect may be performed before the SPSP development suggestion symbol stops, and then the title display of FIG. 38 (I) may be displayed.

  Then, after the SPSP development effect, the SPSP reach effect is started and the output of the BGM 4 is started (T3 in FIG. 36, FIG. 38 (K)). Thereafter, similarly to the above, the SPSP reach effect is performed, and when the result of the special symbol determination is the jackpot, the jackpot notification effect is performed (T4 in FIG. 36, FIGS. 38 (L) to (N)). When the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed (not shown).

  The BGM 4 stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed (FIG. 36, FIG. 38 (M)). Specifically, as in FIG. 35, the BGM 4 stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect or reach lose notification effect is started (for example, one second before).

  In addition, when the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed from the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 4 may be stopped simultaneously with the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific piece of music is output during a fluctuating effect, and the effect proceeds according to the output of the music. Specifically, the music is composed of BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, and BGM5. BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect, BGM2 is output during the N reach effect, and BGM3 is output during the SP reach effect. BGM4 is output during SPSP reach production. Moreover, BGM5 is output in the jackpot notification effect. In other words, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, and BGM4 are output in order as the effects progress like pre-reach effects, N reach effects, SP reach effects, and SPSP reach effects. Since the music progresses as the production progresses in this way, the player who knows the music can recognize the progress of the production according to the position of the music, and depending on which part of the music is output, It is possible to recognize whether the reach effect is being executed, and it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation.

  In addition, during the pre-reach production, BGM1, which is the prelude part of the music, is repeatedly output. BGM1 is a repetition of a predetermined rhythm, and the predetermined rhythm is repeated even when the loss variation pattern (FIG. 18C) is continuously selected. Even if the reach variation pattern (FIG. 18B) or the jackpot variation pattern is selected when the loss variation pattern is continuous, BGM1 is output in the pre-reach effect in the variation effect by the reach variation pattern or the jackpot variation pattern, Thereafter, the BGM 1 is shifted to another BGM in accordance with the execution of the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, or the like. For this reason, it is possible to advance the production according to the flow of music without a sense of incongruity.

  In the present embodiment, the BGM stops when shifting from one effect to another. For example, when developing from N reach production to SP reach production, BGM2 stops and then BGM3 is output. Further, when developing from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 3 is stopped, and then the BGM 4 is output. For this reason, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the boundary of each reach effect, and for example, it is possible to easily recognize the transition from the N reach effect to the highly anticipated SP reach effect. Also, by stopping BGM when developing from one reach production to another, even if the length of each production and the length of each part of the music do not completely match, the reach production and each part of the music You can adjust the time. For example, in the variation effect that develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 25, even if the playback time of BGM2 is shorter than the time from the start time T1 of the N reach effect to the start time T3 of the SP reach effect. By stopping BGM2 during the development performance, the flow of reach production and the progress of music can be matched.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the jackpot notification effect that notifies the jackpot is executed, the BGM that has been output until immediately before is stopped. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is executed from the N reach effect, the BGM 2 stops at the timing when the jackpot notification effect is executed. When the jackpot notification effect is executed from the SP reach effect, the BGM 3 during the SP reach effect stops at the timing when the jackpot notification effect is executed (before the second time when the jackpot notification effect is executed). Further, when the jackpot notification effect is executed from the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 4 stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect is executed (before the first time). Thereby, it is possible to emphasize the jackpot notification effect.

(Control of BGM when production other than reach production is performed)
Next, the control of BGM when another effect is performed during the execution of the pre-reach effect and the reach effect (N reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) will be described. Hereinafter, regarding the control of the BGM in the case where another effect is performed during the pre-reach effect, the change effect that develops from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect (change patterns OP4-1 to HP4-1 to HP4 to 1-3). A description will be given by taking the variation effect based on the example. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the fluctuating effect developed from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect, but the fluctuating effect in which the reach effect is not performed, the fluctuating effect in which the N reach effect is performed, the fluctuating effect in which the N reach effect and the SP reach effect are performed, N The same effects as described below may be performed for the variable effects that develop from the reach effect to the SP reach effect and further develop into the SPSP reach effect, and the same control regarding the BGM is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130 determines a variation effect scenario (each effect pattern in FIG. 22) including the reach effect based on the change pattern determined by the game control unit 100. After determining the scenario of the fluctuation effect, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute a first effect (for example, a notice effect) other than the reach effect by lottery using a random number. When a certain variation pattern is determined, the reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, but even when the same variation pattern is determined, the first effect other than the reach effect is sometimes performed. Sometimes not. Hereinafter, the control of BGM when the first effect is performed and when it is not performed will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when the first effect is executed when BGM1 is being output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

  As described above, BGM1 is continuously output during the pre-reach effect. During this time, BGM1 having a playback time shorter than the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be repeatedly played, or BGM1 having a playback time longer than the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be played. Further, BGM1 having the same playback time as the pre-reach effect execution period may be played back.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first effect may be executed while the pre-reach effect is being executed (for example, at a time point t1 before the time point T1 when the N reach effect is started). The first effect is an effect based on the result of the special symbol determination. The first effect may be a notice effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot (for example, a notice effect with an expectation of 0.1% to 80%), or a confirmed effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed. (Expectation is 100%). For example, as a first effect, a character may be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 may be emitted in a predetermined manner. Further, as the first effect, a predetermined effect sound (for example, a voice of a character or other sound effect) may be output from the speaker 24. Moreover, the production | presentation which suggests the possibility of the setting value which concerns on a jackpot probability may be performed as a 1st production. For example, an effect suggesting that the set value related to the jackpot probability is high (that is, the jackpot probability is high) may be executed as the first effect. Further, as the first effect, an effect indicating confirmation of the set value related to the jackpot probability may be performed. For example, an effect that definitely notifies that the set value related to the jackpot probability is “6” (100%) may be executed as the first effect.

  During the execution of the first effect, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. That is, BGM1 output before the execution of the first effect is output even during the execution of the first effect, and BGM1 is output even after the end of the first effect. Here, during the execution of the first effect, the volume of BGM1 may be the same as before and after the execution of the first effect, or may be smaller than before and after the execution of the first effect. For example, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect or a character's voice) related to the first effect may be output during the execution of the first effect, and the volume of the BGM 1 may be reduced while the effect sound is being output. For example, the volume value (channel volume value described later) of each sound output from the speaker 24 can be set from “0 (mute)” to “10”. The volume value of BGM1 may be set to “5” before execution of the first effect, and the volume value of BGM1 may be set to “3” during execution of the first effect. When the first effect ends, the volume value of BGM1 may be set to “5”, which is the same as before the first effect. Note that while the first effect is being executed, the reproduction of BGM1 is continued internally, but the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to “0”. For example, the volume value of BGM1 is set to “5” before execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM1 is set to “0” while the first effect is being executed, and the volume of BGM1 is ended when the first effect ends. The value may be returned to “5”.

  As described above, even when the first effect is performed during the pre-reach effect, the BGM 1 is continuously reproduced. Therefore, even when the first effect is performed or when the first effect is not performed, the effect can be advanced without breaking the rhythm during the pre-reach effect, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the effect can be matched. Can do.

  The first effect may be performed during the execution of the N reach effect (time points T1 to T2), or the first effect may be performed over the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect. Further, the first effect may be performed during execution of the SPSP reach effect (time points T3 to T4). Moreover, the timing at which the first effect is executed may be arbitrarily determined. For example, based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the production pattern of the fluctuation production including the pre-reach production, the N-reach production, and the SPSP reach production is determined. The timing for performing the first effect is determined by lottery. When the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability of determining the effect pattern of the changing effect accompanied by the first effect may be higher than the probability of determining the effect pattern of the changing effect not accompanying the first effect. The timing for performing the first effect may be any of the pre-reach effects (time points T0 to T1), any of the N reach effects (time points T1 to T2), or the SPSP development effect. It may be any of the time points (time points T2 to T3), or any of the SPSP reach effects (time points T3 to T4).

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the N reach effect is executed, BGM1 stops and BGM2 is output. Further, when the N reach effect is finished and the SPSP reach effect is executed, the reproduction and output of the BGM 4 are started. The BGM output start timing at this time is as described above. That is, at time T1, BGM1 stops and a reach establishment sound is output. After a reach establishment sound is output, BGM2 is output. Further, at time T2, BGM2 is stopped and the SPSP development effect is executed to output the SPSP development sound. After the SPSP development effect is performed, the output of BGM4 is started together with the start of the SPSP reach production.

  During the SPSP reach production, BGM4 is continuously output. The first effect may be performed during the SPSP reach effect. For example, a predetermined cut-in image may be displayed on the entire screen as the first effect while the SPSP reach video effect is displayed at the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Even during the execution of the first effect, the reproduction and output of the BGM 4 are continued. Note that the volume of the BGM 4 may be reduced during the execution of the first effect, and the playback of the BGM 4 may be continued, but the volume value of the BGM 4 may be set to “0”. For example, before execution of the first effect, “8” (volume greater than BGM1 and 2) is set as the volume value of BGM4, and “3” or “0” (BGM4) is set as the volume value of BGM4 during execution of the first effect. Mute) ”is set, and after execution of the first effect, the original sound volume value“ 8 ”may be restored.

  Thereafter, at the time T4 at the end of the SPSP reach production, the jackpot notification production is performed. When the big hit notification effect is performed, the BGM 4 is stopped. Specifically, as described above, the BGM 4 stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect is started. At this time, the reproduction of BGM 4 is not performed internally. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the BGM 4 stops, a jackpot notification effect is executed and a jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output. The volume of the jackpot notification sound is larger than the volume of the BGM 4 that has been output until immediately before. Moreover, after BGM4 stops and a jackpot notification sound is output, BGM5 following BGM4 may be output. That is, the BGM 4 may stop immediately before the start of the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound may be output in response to the start of the jackpot notification effect, and then the BGM 5 may be played and output following the BGM4. The volume of the BGM 5 may be larger, the same as, or smaller than the volume of the BGM 4 output until just before the big hit notification effect. Thereafter, at time T5, the variation effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

  Thus, when the jackpot notification effect is performed, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized by stopping the BGM that has been output until just before, and the player can be focused on the jackpot notification effect. For this reason, a player's expectation and satisfaction can be enhanced.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the BGM playback position at the time when each effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 40, although the case where the result of a special symbol determination is a big win is demonstrated, when the result of a special symbol determination is a loss, except that a reach loss notification effect is performed instead of a big hit notification effect This is the same as FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, the special symbol starts to change at time T0, and the changing effect is started. BGM1 starts to be reproduced from the start point T0 of the variation effect. BGM1 is music having a playback time of sx seconds (for example, 10 seconds). The head of BGM1 (reproduction start time: reproduction time 0 second time) is expressed as “s0”. When sx seconds elapse from the start of reproduction of BGM1, BGM1 is reproduced again from the beginning. Here, the first effect may be started when s1 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) have elapsed from the top of BGM1.

  As shown in FIG. 40B, the first effect may be started when s2 seconds (for example, 8 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of BGM1. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40C, BGM1 may be played before the changing effect is started at time T0. In this case, the first effect may be started when s3 seconds (for example, 3 seconds) have elapsed from the top of BGM1.

  As described above, the first effect can be started at a random playback position (elapsed time from the top of BGM1) in BGM1. Even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same, the first effect is started at a random playback position in BGM1. For example, the variation pattern OP4-1 may be selected in a certain special symbol determination, and the first effect may be started when s1 time has elapsed from the beginning of BGM1, or the variation pattern OP4-1 in another special symbol determination. May be selected, and the first effect may be started when s2 hours have elapsed from the beginning of BGM1.

  On the other hand, the SPSP reach effect is performed at a time T3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation of the special symbol. When the SPSP reach production is started, the BGM 4 is reproduced and output. BGM4 is music having a playback time of sy seconds longer than sx seconds. BGM4 is played back from the beginning. The head of BGM4 is expressed as “r0”. When r1 time (for example, 50 seconds) elapses from the start of reproduction of BGM4, BGM4 stops and a jackpot notification effect is performed. The jackpot notification effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in BGM4 (elapsed time (r1) from the beginning of BGM4). Specifically, since BGM4 stops immediately before the big hit notification effect is started, BGM4 stops after being played from the position r0 to r1, and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop of BGM4. At that point, the jackpot notification effect is started.

  That is, when the variation patterns of the special symbols are the same, the big hit notification effect is started when the reproduction of the BGM 4 proceeds to the position r1 in the BGM 4. For example, the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in a special symbol determination, and when the r1 time has elapsed from the top of the BGM4, the BGM4 stops and the jackpot notification effect is started. In addition, even when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in another special symbol determination, the BGM 4 stops when the r1 time has elapsed from the top of the BGM 4, and the jackpot notification effect is started.

  As described above, the first effect is started at a random playback position (elapsed time from the beginning of the BGM) in the BGM. Since the first effect is randomly started when the BGM is flowing with a good rhythm, the effect can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, since the jackpot notification effect is started at a fixed BGM playback position (for example, at the end of the BGM), it is possible to make the player recognize the timing at which the jackpot notification effect is performed by music, and according to the music flow Can increase the player's expectation. Since the BGM is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is started, the BGM is stopped for a moment due to the stop of the BGM, and the player's expectation can be increased immediately before the jackpot notification effect is performed.

  When the special symbol variation patterns are different, different types of BGM4 are output, the BGM4 stops at different playback positions of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. For example, when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in a certain special symbol determination, the BGM4 stops when the r1 time has elapsed from the top of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Further, when the variation pattern OP4-2 is selected in another special symbol determination, the BGM4 stops when the r2 time (time longer than r1) has elapsed from the top of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Different types of BGM4 may be output during the SPSP reach production when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected and when the variation pattern OP4-2 is selected.

  By varying the fixed playback position where the BGM stops depending on the variation pattern (the position where the jackpot notification effect is started), the length of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot expectation degree) ) Can be recognized, and the expectation degree of jackpot can be recognized.

  Next, the case where the premier effect which suggests that a jackpot game is performed as a 1st effect is demonstrated.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when a premier effect is executed when BGM1 is being output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the special symbol starts to change, and the pre-reach effect is performed. During the pre-reach production, BGM1 is output. There are times when the premier effect is executed at time t1 during the pre-reach effect. The premier effect is a confirmed effect that suggests that a jackpot game is executed (that is, the determination of the jackpot), and the appearance frequency is extremely low (for example, 1/10000). In the premier effect, for example, a premier image (a premier character image, a premier pattern image, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 or the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 indicate a big hit (for example, rainbow color). ). Further, the premiere effect may be an effect of causing the movable accessory 7 to operate in a predetermined manner as an effect suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed, or an effect of causing the movable accessory 7 to emit light in a predetermined manner. . In addition, the premier effect may be an effect in which an effect agent different from the movable accessory 7 is operated in a predetermined manner or light is emitted in a predetermined manner. In addition, the premier effect may be an effect (for example, a specific combination of the decorative symbols 51 or a specific symbol display) that displays the decorative symbols 51 in a manner that suggests the determination of the jackpot. In addition, the premier effect may be an effect that outputs a sound suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

  While the premier effect is being performed, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. For example, the volume of BGM1 during the premier effect may be the same as before and after the premier effect is executed, or may be smaller than before and after the premier effect is executed. Further, while the BGM1 playback is continued internally during the premier production (although the playback position advances as time elapses), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to “0”. In addition, during the premier production, for example, a sound of a premier character or a sound effect indicating confirmation of a big hit may be output. Even if the volume of BGM1 during the premier effect is lowered, the volume of BGM1 is restored to the original after the premier effect. That is, the type and volume of BGM1 do not change before and after the premier effect. Note that after the premier effect, the volume of the BGM 1 may be lowered, may be raised, or a different type of BGM 1 may be output.

  The premier effect may be executed during the N reach effect (time points T1 to T2), may be executed during the SPSP development effect (time points T2 to T3), or during the SPSP reach effect (time points T3 to T3). It may be executed at T4). Further, the premiere effect may be performed a plurality of times in one special symbol change. For example, a premier effect may be performed at the start of the change of the special symbol and during the N reach effect. Even in this case, the BGM is continuously reproduced and output during execution of each premier effect. Moreover, there may be a premier effect where BGM is continued and a premier effect where BGM is stopped.

  After the premier effect is performed in the pre-reach effect, the reach is established and the BGM 1 is stopped, the N reach effect is started, and the BGM 2 is output. Thereafter, BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the SPSP reach effect is started. When the SPSP reach production is started, the output of the BGM 4 is started. Then, as described above, BGM 4 stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect is executed. At this time, the reproduction of BGM 4 is not performed internally. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the BGM 4 stops, a jackpot notification effect is performed and a jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output. The volume of the jackpot notification sound is larger than the volume of the BGM 4 that has been output until immediately before. Moreover, after BGM4 stops and a jackpot notification sound is output, BGM5 following BGM4 may be output. That is, the BGM 4 may stop immediately before the start of the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound may be output in response to the start of the jackpot notification effect, and then the BGM 5 may be played and output following the BGM4. The volume of the BGM 5 may be larger, the same as, or smaller than the volume of the BGM 4 output until just before the big hit notification effect. Thereafter, at time T5, the variation effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

  Thus, even when the premier effect that suggests the determination of the big hit is executed during the output of BGM1, BGM1 is continuously output as in the case where the premier effect is not executed. In addition, the BGM 4 is stopped in the last jackpot notification effect both when the premium effect is executed and when it is not executed.

  For this reason, until the last jackpot notification effect, the effect can be advanced along the flow of music, and the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, by stopping the music in the final jackpot notification effect, the player's expectation can be enhanced and the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized.

  The premiere effect may be performed together with other notice effects. Here, “Premier effect and other notice effect are performed together” means that another notice effect is executed during the premier effect, and other notice effect is executed after the premier effect is executed. In other words, another notice effect is executed before the premiere effect is executed. In other words, if the premiere effect and the other notice effect are performed in such a manner that the relevance has some relationship, the premier effect and the other notice effect need not be performed at the same time. For example, during the premier effect, a premier character that constitutes the premier effect and other characters that do not constitute the premier effect may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. Thus, whether or not to perform the premier effect in combination with other notice effects may be determined by lottery of the effect control unit 130. If it is determined that the premier effect will be combined with other notice effects, the premier effect and other notice effects will be executed together, and it will not be determined if the premier effect will be combined with other notice effects. In this case, only the premier effect is executed. On the other hand, the jackpot notification effect is not performed together with the other notice effect that may be performed in combination with the premier effect. That is, the jackpot notification effect is not executed in combination with the other notice effect that may be performed in combination with the premier effect.

  In the jackpot notification effect, the effect may be performed using more effect means than the effect means used in the premier effect. For example, in the premier effect, the premier effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 (image displayed on the display), the speaker 24 (sound from the sound), and either the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37. In the notification effect, in addition to the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the panel lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37, an effect of notifying the jackpot using the movable accessory 7 may be performed.

  In the jackpot notification effect, an effect that is more decorative than the premier effect is performed. Here, the highly decorative effect is an effect that looks flashy to the player. For example, in the last jackpot notification effect of the variable effect, the movable accessory 7 is operated and an image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and in the premier effect during the reach effect or during the reach effect, The accessory 7 may not be operated, and an image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. In the jackpot notification effect, a louder sound may be output than when the premier effect is executed, a flashy sound (for example, a high sound) may be output, or a long sound may be output. Good.

  In addition, a premier effect may be performed during the SPSP reach effect. For example, as a premier effect during the SPSP reach effect, a cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed on the entire screen. In this case, during the premier production, the output of the BGM that was output until just before that may be continued. The volume of the BGM during the premier production may be the same as that just before the premier production, or may be lowered. Further, during the premier effect, the BGM playback is continued, but the volume value may be set to “0”.

  Whether or not to perform the premier effect is determined by the effect control unit 130 based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, when receiving the change start command from the game control unit 100, the effect control unit 130 determines whether to execute the premier effect based on the change pattern included in the change start command. Determined by the lottery used. In this case, the percentage that the premier effect is executed may be higher as the variation time of the special symbol is shorter. For example, when the variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, the ratio of executing the premier effect may be higher than when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, the ratio of executing the premier effect may be higher than when the variation pattern OP3-1 is selected. For example, there are a first table and a second table for determining whether or not to execute a premier effect, and the ratio of executing the premier effect varies depending on which table is used for the lottery. For example, when a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, a lottery is performed using the first table, and when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, a lottery is performed using the second table. Is called. When the lottery is performed using the first table, the ratio that is determined to execute the premier effect is relatively high, and when the lottery is performed using the second table, it is determined to execute the premier effect. The rate is relatively low. In addition, when the lottery is performed using the first table, the ratio determined to execute the premier effect may be 100%. For example, when a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the rate at which the variation effect including the premier effect is determined is higher than the rate at which the variation effect including the premier effect is determined. May be. In addition, when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, the rate at which the production pattern of the variation production including the premier production is determined is lower than the rate at which the production pattern of the variation production not including the premium production is determined. May be.

  Some players feel annoyance in the production if the production continues for a long time after the premier production that indicates that the jackpot is confirmed. However, since the proportion of the premier effect that is executed becomes higher as the change time is shorter, the change effect ends in a relatively short time after the premier effect is executed, and the jackpot game is played. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such annoyance. In this case, the BGM may be switched after the premier effect is executed (or since the premier effect is being executed). For example, BGM1 and BGM2 that are the first half of the music may be output before the performance of the premiere, and the second half of the music (for example, BGM5) may be output after the performance of the premiere. Thereby, the player can enjoy music even when the fluctuation time is short. When a specific variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the premier effect may be executed at a rate of 100%. Contrary to the above, the proportion of the premium effect may be higher as the variation time of the special symbol is longer. Further, when a specific variation pattern having a long variation time is selected, the premier effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  Next, a case will be described in which an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means is performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when an operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect in the effect pattern of FIG. 41 when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 42, for example, a premier effect may be executed during a pre-reach effect. During the premier production, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. The premier effect in FIG. 42 is the same as the premier effect in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 42, an operation promotion effect (hereinafter referred to as a second operation promotion effect) may be performed at the end of the SPSP reach effect. Here, the operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means. The presence / absence of the second operation promotion effect may be determined by the effect control unit 130 performing a lottery using a random number based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Also, the presence or absence of the second operation promotion effect may be determined corresponding to the variation pattern. When a certain variation pattern is selected, the second operation promotion effect is always performed, and another variation pattern is selected. In such a case, the second operation promotion effect may not be performed.

  For example, the second operation promotion effect is started at time t2 (for example, 8 seconds before time T4) before the big hit notification effect is started. The second operation promotion effect is an effect that is performed immediately before the jackpot notification effect (or reach lose notification effect) is executed, and is, for example, an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28 as an example of the operation means. . For example, during the second operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect lever 28 and an image indicating an operation effective period during which the player's operation is effective are displayed. In addition, during the second operation promotion effect, the effect lever 28 itself may emit light by causing the LED built in the effect lever 28 to emit light. In addition, during the second operation promotion effect, the effect lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28. When the effect lever 28 vibrates during the second operation promotion effect, the possibility that the jackpot notification effect will be performed thereafter may be 100%, or when the effect lever 28 vibrates during the second operation promotion effect The possibility that the jackpot notification effect may be performed may be higher than when the effect lever 28 does not vibrate during the second operation promotion effect.

  When the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, if the stage lever 28 is operated during the second operation promotion stage, the jackpot notification stage is performed according to the operation. Further, during the second operation promotion effect, an operation effective period in which the operation on the effect lever 28 is effective is set, and when the operation effective period elapses without the effect lever 28 being operated, a jackpot notification effect is performed. During the jackpot notification effect, the effect lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28.

  When the second operation promotion effect that prompts the operation on the effect lever 28 is performed in the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot notification effect will be performed later than when the second operation promotion effect is not performed. For example, when the second operation promotion effect is performed, the possibility (expected degree) of being a big hit after that is 50% or more, and when the second operation promotion effect is not performed, the possibility of being a big hit after that May be 35%. In addition, the 2nd operation promotion effect which suggests determination of jackpot (expectation degree is 100%) may be performed.

  If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed according to an operation on the effect lever 28 during the second operation promotion effect or according to the passage of the operation effective period.

  When the second operation promotion effect is executed in the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 4 output during the SPSP reach effect is stopped. The BGM 4 is also stopped during the jackpot notification effect after the second operation promotion effect. Hereinafter, the control of the BGM at the time of executing the second operation promotion effect will be described.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of the second operation promotion effect and the BGM control in the final stage of the SPSP reach effect of FIG. FIG. 43A is a diagram illustrating an example in which BGM4 is stopped in the operation effective period, and FIG. 43B is a diagram illustrating an example in which BGM4 is stopped in the operation preparation period. ) Is a diagram illustrating an example in which the BGM 4 is stopped before the operation preparation period.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the second operation promotion effect is divided into an operation effective period in which the operation of the effect lever 28 is effective and an operation preparation period (before the operation effective period). The operation preparation period for the second operation promotion effect starts at time t2. The operation preparation period is a period for allowing the player to prepare for the operation of the effect lever 28, and thereafter, an effect suggesting that the operation of the effect lever 28 is effective is performed. For example, an image imitating a part of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 and an effect suggesting the possibility that an image imitating the effect lever 28 is displayed. An example of the effect in the operation preparation period will be described later.

  The operation valid period starts at time t3 when the operation preparation period has elapsed from time t2. In the operation effective period, an effect indicating that the operation of the effect lever 28 is currently effective is performed. For example, an image representing the effective period of the operation is displayed together with an image simulating the entire effect lever 28. In the operation effective period, the effect lever 28 itself may emit light by the LED built in the effect lever 28 being emitted. Further, during the operation effective period, the effect lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28. An example of the effect during the operation effective period will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, BGM4 may be output until time t3 when the operation preparation period elapses even if the second operation promotion effect is started at time t2. The BGM 4 is stopped at the timing when the operation valid period starts at the time point t3. After this time t3, BGM4 remains stopped. And if operation with respect to the production | presentation lever 28 is performed in the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period passes), the big hit notification effect will be performed at time T4. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound for reporting the jackpot is output from the speaker 24.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43B, the BGM 4 may be stopped at the timing when the operation preparation period of the second operation promotion effect is started at the time point t2. After this time t2, BGM4 remains stopped. At the time t3 when the operation preparation period elapses, the operation effective period starts. And if operation with respect to the production | presentation lever 28 is performed in the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period passes), the big hit notification effect will be performed at time T4. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound is output from the speaker 24.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43C, the BGM 4 may be stopped at a time point t4 immediately before the operation preparation period for the second operation promotion effect is started. For example, the BGM 4 may stop one second before the operation preparation period starts. After this time t4, the BGM 4 remains stopped. After the BGM 4 is stopped at the time point t4, the operation preparation period for the second operation promotion effect is started at the time point t2. Thereafter, at the time t3 when the operation preparation period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started. And if operation with respect to the production | presentation lever 28 is performed in the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period passes), the big hit notification effect will be performed at time T4. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound is output from the speaker 24.

  In FIGS. 43A to 43C, a sound that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 during the second operation promotion effect (hereinafter referred to as a second operation guide sound) may be output. For example, during the operation preparation period, a second operation guidance sound (for example, a voice “lever retracted”) may be output. Further, the second operation guide sound may be output during the operation effective period. Further, during the operation effective period, the sound may be restricted. The sound restriction state may be a complete silence state or a state where a relatively small sound is output. For example, while a relatively loud sound such as BGM, jackpot notification sound, second operation guidance sound or the like is not output, a state in which the remaining time of the operation effective period is reduced is displayed by the effective period image 81 (described later), A sound effect indicating a decrease in the operation effective period may be output at a relatively small volume.

  Note that as described above, if the gaming machine 1 detects an error even in the sound restriction state, an error sound is output. Further, in this sound limited state, a predetermined winning sound that is output when the game ball wins the start opening may not be output. Note that even in a sound restricted state, a relatively large predetermined winning sound that is output when a game ball wins a start opening may be output. In this case, there may be a case where a winning sound is output or a case where it is not output based on the result of the prior determination. For example, if there is a winning at the start of a game ball in the sound restricted state, and the expectation level of the jackpot for the special symbol determination related to the winning is high (for example, the holding display 52 is “red” or “gold”) When displayed, a winning sound is output, and when the degree of expectation is low even when the game ball is won at the start opening in the sound restricted state (for example, the hold display 52 is displayed in normal “white”). (Sometimes) no winning sound may be output.

  Further, a blackout effect may be performed during the second operation promotion effect. For example, the operation valid period may be started after the blackout effect is performed. Further, a blackout effect may be performed in which images other than the image imitating the effect lever 28 and the image indicating the operation effective period are darkened during the operation effective period.

  In the present embodiment, the BGM control during the second operation promotion effect may be performed in any of FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C). In addition, it may be determined by lottery which of FIGS. 43A to 43C controls the BGM. Further, the degree of expectation that subsequently becomes a big hit may differ depending on which of FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C) is used for control.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the second operation promotion effect is performed or not performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect of the variation effect. The BGM 4 is stopped during the second operation promotion effect. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final jackpot notification effect, and the player can be concentrated on the operation on the effect lever 28. In addition, when the second operation promotion effect (for example, during the operation effective period) is set to a sound restriction state (complete silence state or a state where only a relatively small sound is output), the player is more Can concentrate on operation. By setting the sound limit state before operating the effect lever 28, it is possible to imagine that it will be a big hit after the operation, and the player's expectation can be further increased. Similarly to the above, the second operation promotion effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM 4 (the fixed reproduction position (the elapsed time from the beginning of the BGM is different depending on the variation pattern)). For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is performed by music, and to increase the player's expectation according to the flow of music.

  On the other hand, for example, during the pre-reach production, there is a case where a premier production that suggests the determination of a jackpot is performed and a case where it is not performed. Even when the premier effect is performed, BGM1 is continuously output. For this reason, even if a premier effect is performed or a premier effect is not performed, the effect can be advanced with the same rhythm during the pre-reach effect, and the rhythm of music and the progress of the effect can be matched. Similarly to the above, since the premier production starts at a random playback position in the BGM1 when the BGM1 is flowing with a good rhythm, the production can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can do.

  Next, a case where the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the premier effect and the second operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect will be described.

  FIG. 44 shows the BGM when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the premiere effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of control of.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the first operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the premier effect. The first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the effect button 26 and is an effect that has a lower degree of expectation of jackpot than the second operation promotion effect. After the fluctuating effect is started at time T0, for example, the first operation promotion effect is performed during the pre-reach effect. Specifically, the first operation promotion effect is executed at time t5 (for example, 3 seconds before time t1) before the premiere effect is executed.

  In the first operation promotion effect, for example, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 and an image indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 26 is output. When the effect button 26 is pressed during the operation valid period, a premier effect is executed. If the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation effective period, the subsequent premier effect may not be executed. Regardless of whether or not there is an operation on the effect button 26, a premier effect may be executed as the operation effective period elapses.

  During the first operation promotion effect, the effect button 26 itself may emit light by the LED built in the effect button 26 being emitted. In addition, during the first operation promotion effect, the effect button 26 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect button 26. When the effect button 26 vibrates during the first operation promotion effect, the possibility that the premiere effect will be performed after the operation may be higher than when the effect button 26 does not vibrate during the first operation promotion effect.

  During the execution of the first operation promotion effect, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. For example, the volume of BGM1 during the first operation promotion effect may be the same as that before execution of the first operation promotion effect, or may be lower than that before execution of the first operation promotion effect. Further, while the reproduction of BGM1 is continued internally during the first operation promotion effect (although the reproduction position advances as time elapses), the volume value of BGM1 may be set to “0”.

  Further, during the first operation promotion effect, a first operation guidance sound that prompts the player to perform an operation on the effect button 26 may be output. The first operation guide sound may be a sound different from the second operation guide sound. For example, the first operation guide sound may be an electronic sound. Further, the first operation guide sound may be shorter than the second operation guide sound. In addition, the volume of the first operation guide sound may be smaller than the volume of the second operation guide sound. Further, the first operation guide sound may be the same sound as the second operation guide sound. In addition, the first operation guide sound may be output or not output, while the second operation guide sound may be output without fail.

  Note that the first operation promotion effect may be an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the effect lever 28. Further, as the first operation promotion effect, there are an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 and an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28, and these may be selected by lottery. In this case, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, the premiere is performed later than when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 is executed as the first operation promotion effect. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed easily. Note that when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, the premier effect may be executed with a probability of 100%.

  Thus, the first operation promotion effect performed immediately before the premiere effect is an effect that prompts the operation in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect performed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect of the variation effect is This is an effect that prompts an operation in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the press of the effect button 26 (first operation mode), and the second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the operation of pulling the effect lever 28 (second operation mode). Further, for example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 26, and the second operation promotion effect causes the player to press and hold the effect button 26 (the button is kept pressed for a predetermined time). It may be an effect for.

  As described above, BGM1 is continuously output even when the first operation promotion effect is performed during the variation effect. For this reason, even when the first operation promotion effect is performed or when the first operation promotion effect is not performed, the effect can be advanced with the same rhythm during the pre-reach effect. Can be matched. Further, the premier effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM1, and the first operation promotion effect is also started at a random reproduction position in BGM1. For this reason, when BGM1 is flowing with a good rhythm, the production can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, the BGM 4 is stopped during the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final jackpot notification effect. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final jackpot notification effect, and the player can be concentrated on the operation on the effect lever 28. Further, when the sound restriction state is set during the second operation promotion effect (for example, during the operation effective period), the player can be concentrated by the operation. By setting the sound limit state before operating the effect lever 28, it is possible to imagine that it will be a big hit after the operation, and the player's expectation can be further increased. In addition, the second operation promotion effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM 4 (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the beginning. The predetermined time varies depending on the variation pattern). For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is performed by music, and to increase the player's expectation according to the flow of music.

  In the present embodiment, there are cases where a notice effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit is performed during a varying effect and when it is not performed. Hereinafter, a case where a notice effect that suggests the possibility of jackpot is performed during the output of BGM1 will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when a notice effect is executed when BGM1 is output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the special symbol starts to change and the pre-reach effect is performed. During the pre-reach production, BGM1 is output. The notice effect may be executed at time t1 during the pre-reach effect. The notice effect is an effect that suggests the possibility (expectation) of the jackpot. There are a plurality of types of notice effects. For example, as a notice effect, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed, a serif notice effect in which a predetermined character emits a line, a step-up notice effect in which the degree of expectation increases step by step, a notice effect using a decorative pattern 51, pseudo continuous There are a notice, a notice effect using the movable accessory 7, and the like. The level of expectation for jackpots differs for each type of notice effect. Further, a changing change effect in which the changing display 53 changes may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be an effect that suggests a set value related to the jackpot probability.

  Note that the notice effect may be executed during the N reach effect, may be performed during the SPSP development effect, or may be performed during the SPSP reach effect. Further, the notice effect may be performed a plurality of times in one variation effect. For example, the notice effect may be performed at the start of the change of the special symbol and during the N reach effect. Not limited to these timings, the notice effect may be performed at any timing from the start of change of the special symbol to the stop of change.

  While the notice effect is being performed, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. For example, the volume of the BGM 1 during the notice effect may be the same as before or after execution of the notice effect, or may be smaller than before and after execution of the notice effect. Further, while the playback of the BGM1 is continued internally during the notice effect (although the playback position advances as time elapses), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to “0”. Further, during the notice effect, for example, the voice or sound effect of the character may be output. Even if the volume of BGM1 is reduced during the notice effect, the sound volume of BGM1 is restored after the notice effect. That is, the type and volume of BGM 1 do not change before and after the notice effect. After the notice effect, the volume of BGM1 may be lowered, may be raised, or a different type of BGM1 may be output.

  Further, the volume of the BGM 1 during the notice effect may be changed according to the expected degree of the notice effect. For example, as the degree of expectation of the notice effect is higher, the volume of the BGM 1 during the notice effect may be decreased or increased.

  After the notice effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 45, reach is established, BGM1 is stopped, N reach effect is started, and output of BGM2 is started. Thereafter, the BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the SPSP reach effect is started. When the SPSP reach production is started, the output of the BGM 4 is started. In the same manner as described above, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is executed in the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, and the jackpot notification effect is performed.

  Thus, even when the notice effect indicating the possibility of a big hit is executed, BGM1 is continuously output as in the case where the notice effect is not executed. In addition, the BGM 4 is stopped in the last jackpot notification effect both when the notice effect is executed and when it is not executed.

  For this reason, until the last jackpot notification effect, the effect can be advanced along the flow of music, and the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, by stopping the music in the final jackpot notification effect, the player's expectation can be enhanced and the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized.

  Note that a certain notice effect may be performed together with other notice effects, or may not be performed together with other notice effects. That is, a certain notice effect may be performed in combination with other notice effects, or may not be performed in combination with other notice effects. Here, in a case where “a certain notice effect and another notice effect are performed together (a certain notice effect and another notice effect are combined)”, another notice effect is executed during the execution of a certain notice effect. In other words, execution of another notice effect after execution of a certain notice effect includes execution of another notice effect before execution of a certain notice effect. That is, as long as an effect is performed in such a manner that a certain notice effect and another notice effect have some relationship, a certain notice effect and another notice effect need not be performed at the same time. For example, a first character that is a part of the first notice effect is displayed during the first notice effect, and a second character that indicates the second notice effect is displayed while the first character is displayed. There may be times when it is not displayed. On the other hand, the second notice effect that may be performed in combination with the first notice effect is not performed during the jackpot notification effect. That is, the jackpot notification effect is not executed together with the second notice effect. Whether or not the first notice effect is combined with the second notice effect is determined by lottery of the effect control unit 130. For example, the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first notice effect and the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second notice effect may be performed independently, or whether or not the first notice effect is executed. A lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second notice effect may be performed based on the lottery result. The degree of jackpot expectation may be the same or different when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are combined and when they are not combined. For example, when the expectation degree of the first notice effect is 10% and the expectation degree of the second notice effect is 20%, the expectation degree when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination is as follows: The higher the expected degree (20%) of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, for example, the expectation when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are combined is 30%. May be. Conversely, the expectation may be lowered depending on the combination of the notice effects. For example, when the expectation degree of the first notice effect is 10% and the expectation degree of the second notice effect is 20%, the expectation degree when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination May be lower than the higher degree of expectation (20%), for example, 15%.

  In the jackpot notification effect, the effect is performed using more effect means than the effect means used in the notice effect. For example, in the notice effect, the effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 (image displayed on it), and in the jackpot notification effect, the liquid crystal display device 5, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the movable accessory 7 are used. An effect to notify the jackpot may be performed. In the notice effect, the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 (sound from the sound) are used, and in the jackpot notification effect, the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the movable combination. The effect which alert | reports jackpot using the thing 7 may be performed. It should be noted that, in the jackpot notification effect, any effect may be performed without being limited to the number of effect means as long as an effect with higher decorativeness than the notice effect is performed.

  Next, a case where the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the notice effect and the second operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect will be described.

  FIG. 46 shows the BGM when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the notice effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the last jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of control of.

  The second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28. The second operation promotion effect is the same as the second operation promotion effect in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the notice effect. The first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the effect button 26 and is an effect that is less expected than the second operation promotion effect. After the fluctuating effect is started at time T0, for example, the first operation promotion effect is performed during the pre-reach effect. Specifically, the first operation promotion effect is executed at time t5 (for example, 3 seconds before time t1) before the notice effect is executed.

  For example, in the first operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 and an image indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 26 is output. When the effect button 26 is pressed during the operation valid period, a notice effect is executed. If the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation effective period, the subsequent notice effect may not be executed, or the notice effect may be executed as the operation effective period elapses. For example, if it is determined that a notice effect with a relatively low expectation is to be executed, the notice effect may not be executed when the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation effective period. On the other hand, when it is determined that a notice effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, when the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation effective period, the notice effect is executed as the operation effective period elapses. May be.

  The first operation promotion effect in FIG. 46 may be the same effect as the first operation promotion effect in FIG. 44, or may be an effect in a different form. For example, when the premiere effect of FIG. 44 is executed, the effect button 26 may emit light in a specific manner or vibrate in the first operation promotion effect. On the other hand, when the notice effect of FIG. 46 is executed, the effect button 26 does not emit light in a specific manner and does not vibrate in the first operation promotion effect.

  During the execution of the first operation promotion effect, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. For example, the volume of BGM1 during the first operation promotion effect may be the same as that before execution of the first operation promotion effect, or may be lower than that before execution of the first operation promotion effect. Further, while the reproduction of BGM1 is continued internally during the first operation promotion effect (although the reproduction position advances as time elapses), the volume value of BGM1 may be set to “0”.

  Further, during the first operation promotion effect, a first operation guidance sound that prompts the player to perform an operation on the effect button 26 may be output. The first operation guide sound may be a sound different from the second operation guide sound. For example, during the first operation promotion effect, a sound effect (e.g., an electronic sound) that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 is output, and during the second operation promotion effect, a different sound (e.g., the voice of the character. May be output. Since the effect after the notice effect is the same as in FIGS. 41 and 42, the description thereof is omitted. Further, the first operation guide sound may be the same sound as the second operation guide sound.

  The first operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the notice effect may be an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28 in the same manner as the second operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the jackpot notification effect. . Further, as the first operation promotion effect, there are an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 and an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28, and these may be selected by lottery. In this case, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, an expectation is made later than when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 is executed as the first operation promotion effect. It may be configured such that a high-priority notice effect is easily executed. In addition, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, a notice effect with a high expectation may be subsequently executed with a probability of 100%.

  The first operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the notice effect is an effect that prompts the operation in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the jackpot notification effect is different from the first operation mode. This is an effect that prompts an operation in the second operation mode. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the press of the effect button 26 (first operation mode), and the second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the operation of pulling the effect lever 28 (second operation mode). Further, for example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 26, and the second operation promotion effect causes the player to press and hold the effect button 26 for a long time (the button is kept pressed). It may be a production.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 46, the BGM is continuously reproduced during the first operation promotion effect, and the BGM that has been output until immediately before the second operation promotion effect is stopped. The same effect as described with reference can be obtained.

  Next, control of BGM in the case where an operation promotion effect is performed before the SPSP development effect will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. FIG. 47 shows the flow of the variation effect when the jackpot variation pattern (OP4-1 to OP4-3) including the N reach effect and the SPSP reach effect is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 47, at the time T0, the change of the special symbol is started and the pre-reach effect is performed. BGM1 is output during pre-reach production. The first operation promotion effect may be executed during the pre-reach effect, and when the operation is performed during the first operation promotion effect, the first effect (the notice effect or the premier effect) may be executed. BGM1 is continuously reproduced during execution of the first operation promotion effect and the first effect. As described above, during the execution of the first effect, the volume of BGM1 may be decreased or may not be decreased, and playback of BGM1 is continued, but the volume value of BGM1 is set to “0”. May be. In addition, during execution of the first effect, another sound (sound effect or character sound) different from BGM1 may be output.

  Subsequently, reach is established at time T1. When reach is established, BGM1 is stopped. When reach is established and N reach production is started, BGM2 is output.

  After the N reach effect is started, the third operation promotion effect is performed at time t6. The third operation promotion effect is an effect that is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is executed (for example, 4 seconds before), and is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means (the effect button 26 or the effect lever 28). . The third operation promotion effect may be an effect having a higher expectation level than the first operation promotion effect and a lower expectation level than the second operation promotion effect. For example, in the third operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47, BGM2 stops at the timing when the third operation promotion effect is performed. BGM2 playback is also stopped internally. During the third operation promotion effect, a third operation guidance sound that prompts the player to operate the operation means may be output. For example, the third operation guide sound is a sound effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26, and may be a sound different from (or the same as) the first operation guide sound. Further, the third operation guide sound may be output at the same volume as the first operation guide sound, or may be output at a volume that is larger (or smaller) than the first operation guide sound.

  When the operation on the effect button 26 is performed during the third operation promotion effect, or when the operation valid period in the third operation promotion effect elapses, the SPSP development effect is performed (time point T2). As described above, the SPSP development effect varies depending on the SPSP reach effect to be executed and varies depending on the variation pattern. In addition, SPSP development sound is output during the SPSP development effect. Also, BGM2 remains stopped during the SPSP development effect.

  A blackout effect may be performed during the third operation promotion effect or the SPSP development effect. For example, as a blackout effect during the third operation promotion effect, a button image 83 imitating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 84 (described later) indicating the operation effective period are displayed relatively brightly, and background images other than these are displayed. For example, an effect may be performed in which the information is displayed relatively darkly. Further, a blackout effect may be performed according to an operation during the third operation promotion effect. During the blackout effect, the sound may be limited (a state where no sound is output or a state where only a relatively small sound is output). In addition, when there is a winning at the start of the game ball in this sound restricted state, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the winning may not be output or may be output. In addition, when there is a winning at the game ball start opening in the sound restricted state, depending on the expectation of jackpot for the special symbol determination related to winning, there are cases where the winning sound is output or not output Also good.

  When the SPSP development effect ends, the SPSP reach effect starts (time point T3). BGM4 is output during SPSP reach production. At the time t2 at the end of the SPSP reach effect, the above-described second operation promotion effect may be performed. For example, the BGM 4 stops immediately before the second operation promotion effect starts. Further, the second operation guidance sound is output during the second operation promotion effect.

  And when operation with respect to the production | presentation lever 28 is performed during the 2nd operation promotion production, or when the operation effective period in a 2nd operation promotion production passes, a winning notification production | presentation (a jackpot notification production | presentation or reach lose notification production | generation effect) will be performed ( Time T4).

  An effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 may be executed as the third operation promotion effect. Also, as the third operation promotion effect, any one of an effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 and an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 may be selected and executed by lottery. When an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as a third operation promotion effect, an SPSP development effect (and an SPSP reach effect) with a higher expectation than when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 is executed. May be easily performed. For example, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is 80% in proportion to the operation on the effect lever 28 during the third operation promotion effect. The SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of 20%. Further, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is 20% in proportion to the operation on the effect button 26 during the third operation promotion effect. The SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of 80%. Further, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is 100% in proportion to the operation on the effect lever 28 during the third operation promotion effect. May be executed. In addition, when an effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 26 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is not executed in response to an operation on the effect button 26 during the third operation promotion effect. The SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of%.

  The third operation promotion effect (and SPSP development effect) may be started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM (for example, 20 seconds from the top of the BGM). This fixed reproduction position may vary depending on the variation pattern. For example, when the N reach effect is started, the BGM 2 may be played back from the beginning, the third operation promotion effect may be executed at a fixed playback position in the BGM 2, and the SPSP development effect may be started according to the operation. In this way, the third operation promotion effect and the SPSP development effect are started at the fixed playback position in the BGM, so that the player can recognize the timing at which the SPSP development effect is performed by music, and the music flow Accordingly, it is possible to increase the player's expectation. Note that the third operation promotion effect may be started at a random reproduction position in the BGM 2 (for example, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds from the top of the BGM).

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating another example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. 48, the description of the same parts as those in FIG. 47 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the third operation promotion effect is started at time t6 during the N reach effect. In this case, BGM2 is continuously output even during the third operation promotion effect. Note that when the third operation guidance sound that prompts the player to perform an operation during the third operation promotion effect is output, the volume of the BGM2 during the third operation promotion effect may be reduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 48, the SPSP development effect is performed and BGM2 is stopped according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect or according to the fact that the operation valid period of the third operation promotion effect has elapsed. (Time T2). Thereafter, the same effects as in FIG. 47 are performed.

  As described above, the effect patterns of various varying effects have been described. However, each effect pattern is merely an example, and some effects may or may not be executed in each effect pattern. For example, in FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may not be executed and only the second operation promotion effect may be executed. In FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may be executed and the second operation promotion effect may not be executed.

  In addition, for example, in FIG. 47, the second operation promotion effect may not be executed, and the first and third operation promotion effects may be executed, or the first operation promotion effect may not be executed. The third and second operation promotion effects may be executed, or the first and second operation promotion effects may not be executed, and only the third operation promotion effect may be executed.

(Specific production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect produced by the above-described effect pattern will be described. In the following, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of an effect following FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, when the variation of the special symbol is started, a start effect in which the decorative symbol 51 starts to vary is performed. If BGM1 has not been output immediately before the start of the special symbol change, in response to the start of the special symbol change, the image sound control unit 140 starts playing BGM1, and BGM1 is output from the speaker 24. The Also, if BGM1 is output at the time when the change of the special symbol starts, the output BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output.

  Next, the first operation promotion effect may be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol 51 (FIG. 49B, time point t5 in FIG. 44). For example, as the first operation promotion effect, a button image 80 that simulates the effect button 26 and an effective period image 81 that indicates an operation effective period of the effect button 26 are displayed. The effective period image 81 is an image indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. For example, the remaining time is displayed by reducing a white horizontally long image indicating the remaining time as time elapses. When the first operation promotion effect is executed, a first operation guide sound that prompts the player to press the effect button 26 is output. For example, an electronic sound may be output as the first operation guidance sound. Further, during the operation effective period, the effect button 26 itself may be caused to emit light by causing the LED built in the effect button 26 to emit light.

  While the first operation promotion effect is being performed, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Note that when the first operation guidance sound is output, the volume of the BGM 1 may be smaller than before the first operation guidance sound is output. In addition, during this first operation promotion effect, for example, when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, a predetermined winning sound indicating the winning of the game ball at the start port may be output as described above. is there. Even in this case, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. The volume of BGM1 may be the same when the predetermined winning sound is output and when the predetermined winning sound is not output, and when the predetermined winning sound is output, the volume of BGM1 is decreased. May be.

  When an operation is performed on the effect button 26 during the first operation promotion effect, a premier effect is executed in accordance with the operation (FIG. 49C, time point t1 in FIG. 44). For example, as a premier effect, a premier character 60 is displayed, and a line 61 (for example, a “congratulations” character suggesting a jackpot decision) displayed by the premier character 60 is displayed. In addition to the display of the dialogue 61, the voice of the premier character 60 (for example, the voice of “congratulations”) is output from the speaker 24. At this time, BGM1 is continuously reproduced. For example, the reproduction of BGM1 is continued, but the volume value of BGM1 is temporarily set to “0” (mute). The volume of the voice of the premier character 60 is larger than the volume of the BGM 1 before the premiere effect is executed. For this reason, the player can easily hear the voice of the premier character 60. During the performance of the premier effect, the volume value of BGM1 may be set to a value larger than “0”. For example, the volume value of BGM1 may be set to “5” before the execution of the premier effect and the first operation promotion effect, and the volume value of BGM1 may be reduced to “3” while the premier effect is being executed. May be left as it is.

  Note that a vibration motor is provided inside the effect button 26, and the effect button 26 may be vibrated using the vibration motor when the first operation promotion effect and / or the premier effect is executed. By oscillating the vibration motor during the first operation promotion effect, the player can be expected to perform a highly expected effect before operating the effect button 26.

  When the premiere effect ends, the premier character 60 disappears from the screen, and the volume of BGM1 also returns to before the execution of the first operation promotion effect and the premier effect (FIG. 49 (D)). Since the reproduction of BGM1 is continued during the execution of the premier effect in FIG. 49C, the reproduction position of BGM1 advances with the passage of time. For this reason, when the premier effect ends and the volume of BGM1 returns, BGM1 advances more than before the premier effect execution. For example, if the production time of the first operation promotion effect and the premiere effect is 5 seconds, and the playback position of BGM1 is the time when 5 seconds have passed from the beginning of BGM1 immediately before the start of the first operation promotion effect, the premium effect The playback position of BGM1 at the time when is finished is a position 10 seconds from the beginning of BGM1.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the end of the premiere effect, the same kind of decorative symbols (for example, “8” symbols) are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions, and reach is established (FIG. 49 (E), time T1 in FIG. 44). ). When reach is established, BGM1 stops and a reach establishment sound is output.

  When reach is established, N reach production is performed, BGM2 is output, and the decorative design fluctuates in the middle region (FIG. 49F). During the N reach production, BGM2 is continuously output.

  During the N reach production, there is a case where the development suggestion production suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production is performed (FIG. 49G). For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (G), the “7” symbol indicating the loss moves slowly from the upper direction to the lower direction as the middle decorative symbol 51b and passes through the middle region, and then the SPSP reach. A state in which the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the production slowly moves from the upper direction to the lower direction of the screen is displayed.

  Then, the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped as the medium decoration symbol 51b, and the SPSP development effect indicating that the SPSP reach effect is developed is performed (FIG. 49 (H), time point T2 in FIG. 44). When the SPSP development suggestion symbol 51b stops, the BGM2 stops and an SPSP development sound that suggests development to SPSP reach production is output.

  In the screen shown in FIG. 49 (H), if the “8” symbol is stopped as a medium decoration symbol, the jackpot is achieved, and if a numerical symbol other than the “8” symbol is stopped, the game is lost. In addition, when the medium decorative design moves slowly and then moves again at a high speed, it develops into SP reach production.

  Subsequently to FIG. 49 (H), the title of the SPSP reach effect is displayed (FIG. 50 (I)). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of SPSP reach effects. In FIG. 50I, titles corresponding to the SPSP reach effects to be executed are displayed. This allows the player to recognize the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed. At this time, an image of a character or person appearing in the SPSP reach production may be displayed. In addition, sound corresponding to the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed may be output from the speaker 24.

  When switching from the screen of FIG. 49H to the screen of FIG. 50I, the left and right decorative symbols move to the left and right of the upper area of the screen while being reduced. In addition, between FIGS. 49A to 49H, each decorative design is displayed in a form in which an image of a predetermined character is attached to a numeral. When the SPSP reach production is started, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the left and right decorative symbols are displayed relatively small on the left and right of the upper area of the screen, and the image of a predetermined character is displayed as a number. It is displayed in a mode not marked with.

  Next, after a switching image (not shown) indicating switching to the SPSP reach effect is displayed, the SPSP reach effect is started (FIG. 50 (J), time point T3 in FIG. 44). During the SPSP reach production, the SPSP reach video production is displayed in the center area of the screen. When the SPSP reach production is started, the BGM 4 starts to be output from the speaker 24. The BGM 4 has a predetermined playback time, and playback starts from the beginning. Also, different BGM4s are prepared for each type of SPSP reach production, and BGM4 corresponding to the type of SPSP reach production to be executed is output. During the SPSP reach production, BGM4 is continuously output.

  In the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the second operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 50 (K), time point t2 in FIG. 44). At the time (or just before the start) of the second operation promotion effect, the BGM 4 stops. A predetermined period after the start of the second operation promotion effect is an operation preparation period, and in the operation preparation period, a state in which an image imitating the effect lever 28 is gradually completed is displayed. For example, in response to the start of the second operation promotion effect, a left lever partial image 91 simulating a part of the left side of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen (FIG. 50 (K)).

  Subsequently, in the operation preparation period, in addition to the left lever partial image 91, a right lever partial image 92 simulating a part of the right side of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen (FIG. 50 (L)).

  Next, a central lever partial image 93 simulating the center portion of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen, and an image simulating the effect lever 28 is completed (FIG. 50 (M), immediately before time point t3 in FIG. 43). Specifically, a completed image 90 that imitates all of the effect lever 28 is displayed immediately before the end of the operation preparation period (immediately before the start of the operation effective period), and characters that prompt the player to operate the effect lever 28 ( For example, “let the lever close” is displayed. Also, immediately before the end of the operation preparation period, the speaker 24 outputs a second operation guidance sound that prompts the player to perform an operation on the effect lever 28 (for example, a voice “lever is pulled”). The second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound, or may be louder than the first operation guide sound.

  Then, an operation effective period in which the operation of the effect lever 28 is effective starts, and an effective period image 95 indicating the operation effective period is displayed (FIG. 50 (N), time point t3 in FIG. 43).

  It should be noted that the display of the completed image 90 that imitates the effect lever 28, the display of the characters “Turn the lever” prompting the operation of the effect lever 28, the display of the effective period image 95, and the output of the second operation guide sound These may be performed at the same timing or at different timings. For example, the display of these images and the output of the second operation guidance sound may be performed at the start of the operation effective period.

  The operation effective period related to the second operation promotion effect is longer than the operation effective period related to the first operation promotion effect (FIG. 49B). For this reason, the effective period image 95 shown in FIG. 50N may be longer in the horizontal direction than the effective period image 81 shown in FIG.

  When the operation effective period of the second operation promotion effect starts, a sound restriction state in which neither BGM nor the second operation guidance sound is output is set. For example, a silent state in which no sound is output during the operation effective period may be entered. Further, only a relatively small sound may be output during the operation effective period. For example, during the operation effective period, a state in which the remaining time of the operation effective period decreases is displayed using the effective period image 95, and a relatively small sound effect may be output as the remaining time decreases.

  The jackpot notification effect is performed in response to the operation on the effect lever 28 being performed during the operation effective period or in response to the operation effective period having elapsed without the operation on the effect lever 28 being performed. (FIG. 50 (O), time point T4 in FIG. 44). Specifically, “8” symbols of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols stop as the middle decorative symbol 51b, and the movable accessory 7 advances into the center area of the screen. A jackpot notification sound for reporting the jackpot is output.

  After the jackpot notification effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the movable accessory 7 is retracted to the initial position, and after the three similar decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped in the center area of the screen, the main stop is performed (see FIG. 50 (P)).

  Next, a specific example of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. In the following, in FIG. 51, only the parts different from FIG. 49 will be described, and the description of the same parts will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the first operation promotion effect may be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol 51 (FIG. 51 (B), time point t5 in FIG. 46). Specifically, a button image 80 imitating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 81 indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 26 are displayed as the first operation promotion effect. At this time, a first operation guidance sound that prompts the player to press the effect button 26 is output. For example, an electronic sound may be output as the first operation guidance sound. Here, the same sound as the first operation guidance sound (FIG. 49B) in the first operation promotion effect immediately before the premier effect may be output, or a different sound may be output.

  While the first operation promotion effect is being performed, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. In addition, while the 1st operation guidance sound is output, the volume of BGM1 may be the same as before execution of a 1st operation promotion effect, and may be made small. For example, when a game ball wins the first start port 11 during the first operation promotion effect, it is the same as FIG.

  When an operation is performed on the effect button 26 during the first operation promotion effect, a notice effect is executed according to the operation (FIG. 51C, time point t1 in FIG. 46). For example, a predetermined character 65 is displayed as a notice effect, and a line 66 (for example, a “chance” character that suggests the possibility of a big hit) is displayed as well. Further, along with the display of the lines 66, the sound of the predetermined character 65 (the sound of “chance”) is output from the speaker 24. At this time, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Specifically, the volume of BGM1 during the notice effect is lowered than the volume of BGM1 before the first operation promotion effect and the notice effect are executed. Further, the volume of the voice of the predetermined character 65 is larger than the volume of BGM 1 before the announcement effect is executed and during the announcement effect. For this reason, the player can easily hear the voice of the predetermined character 65.

  Note that there are a plurality of types of notice effects, and the degree of expectation for jackpots differs for each type of notice effect. When executing the notice effect, a different sound may be output depending on the expectation degree of the notice effect. In this case, the volume of the BGM 1 during the notice effect may be reduced according to the expected degree of the notice effect.

  Further, the volume of BGM 1 does not have to be reduced while the first operation promotion effect and the notice effect are being executed.

  Further, depending on the expected degree of the notice effect to be executed, the effect button 26 may be vibrated using the vibration motor when the first operation promotion effect is executed and / or when the notice effect is executed. .

  When the notice effect is finished, the predetermined character 65 disappears from the screen, and the volume of BGM1 also returns to before the execution of the first operation promotion effect and the notice effect (FIG. 51 (D)). That is, the volume of BGM1 returns to the volume before execution of the first operation promotion effect and the notice effect. For example, the volume value of BGM1 is set to “5” before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, and the volume value of BGM1 is reduced to “3” while the announcement effect is being executed (while the voice of the predetermined character 65 is being output). Then, after the end of the notice effect (after outputting the sound of the predetermined character 65), the volume value of the BGM 1 is set to “5”. Since the reproduction of BGM1 is continued during the execution of the notice effect of FIG. 51 (C), the reproduction position of BGM1 advances with the passage of time. For this reason, when the notice effect is finished and the volume of the BGM 1 is restored, the BGM 1 is more advanced than before the notice effect is executed.

  The effects after FIG. 51 (D) are the same as those after FIG. 49 (D) (FIG. 49 (D) to FIG. 50 (P)), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a specific example of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. In the following, in FIG. 52, only different parts from FIG. 51 will be described, and description of similar parts will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 52A to 52D, the effects are performed in the order of the start effect, the first operation promotion effect, and the notice effect. Following FIG. 52 (D), reach is established, BGM1 stops (time T1 in FIG. 47), and N reach effect is performed (FIG. 52 (E)). BGM2 is output at the timing when the N reach effect is started.

  During the N reach production, there is a case where a third operation promotion production for urging the operation on the production button 26 is performed (FIG. 52 (F), time point t6 in FIG. 47). Specifically, a button image 83 simulating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 84 indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 26 are displayed as the third operation promotion effect. The button image 83 displayed here is a larger image than the button image 80 in the first operation promotion effect of FIG. Further, the button image 83 may be an image having a different color and pattern from the button image 80. The button image 83 may be the same image as the button image 80, or may be an image having the same size as the button image 80. In addition, an image prompting the user to press the effect button 26 (for example, a letter “press button”) is displayed on the screen. The third operation promotion effect may be an effect that prompts an operation on the effect lever 28.

  When the third operation promotion effect is executed, the BGM2 output during the N reach effect stops. Specifically, the reproduction of BGM2 is also stopped internally. Further, when the third operation promotion effect is executed, a third operation guide sound that prompts the user to press the effect button 26 is output. For example, a voice that prompts the user to press the effect button 26 (for example, a voice “press the button”) may be output as the third operation guidance sound.

  During the third operation promotion effect, the effective period image 84 changes according to the remaining operation effective period (FIG. 52 (G)). Further, during the third operation promotion effect, a sound restriction state in which neither BGM nor the third operation guidance sound is output may be set. For example, a silence state may be set during the third operation promotion effect. Further, during the third operation promotion effect, only a relatively small sound may be output.

  Then, an SPSP development effect is performed in response to an operation performed on the effect button 26 during the third operation promotion effect or in response to the expiration of the operation effective period (FIG. 52 (H), FIG. 47 time point T2). For example, an SPSP development suggestion design that suggests development to SPSP reach production is displayed in the center area of the screen. Also, SPSP development sound that suggests development to SPSP reach production is output. In FIG. 52H, an image different from the SPSP development suggestion symbol displayed in FIG. 49H or FIG. 51H may be displayed.

  Since the effects after FIG. 52 (H) are the same as those after FIG. 49 (H) (FIGS. 49 (H) to 50 (P)), the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 52, BGM2 is stopped when the third operation promotion effect is started. However, when the third operation promotion effect is started, BGM2 is not stopped and the third operation promotion effect is stopped. During this, BGM1 may be continuously output. In this case, BGM2 is stopped in response to the start of the SPSP development effect in FIG.

  Further, when the third operation promotion effect is started, or when the SPSP development effect is started, the blackout effect may be performed. Hereinafter, an example of a blackout effect will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed in response to an operation during the third operation promotion effect. 53, only the parts different from FIG. 52 will be described, and the description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In FIGS. 53A to 53F, the same effects as in FIGS. 52A to 52F are performed. In FIG. 53 (F), a third operation promotion effect is performed, and an operation on the effect button 26 is prompted. When the third operation promotion effect is started, BGM2 stops. When the operation on the effect button 26 is performed during the operation effective period of the third operation promotion effect, or when the operation effective period elapses without the operation on the effect button 26 being performed, the blackout effect is performed (see FIG. 53 (G)). For example, in the blackout effect, a black image is displayed on the entire screen, and the entire screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 becomes dark. During blackout production, the sound is restricted. For example, during a blackout effect, the sound may be silent, or only a relatively small sound may be output.

  Even when the blackout effect is performed, the fourth symbol 55 is displayed on the screen. The fourth symbol 55 is displayed small in a predetermined area (for example, lower right) of the screen even during the blackout effect. That is, the fourth symbol 55 is always displayed in a variable manner while the special symbol is changing. The fourth symbol 55 is displayed in the same display mode (brightness and size) as before the blackout effect even during the blackout effect, and does not become dark like a background image or the like. Even after the blackout effect, the display mode of the fourth symbol 55 does not change. The fourth symbol 55 may be displayed not by the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 but by, for example, an LED display device provided around the screen.

  Note that the decorative symbol 51 may also be displayed in the same display mode (brightness and size) as before the blackout effect during the blackout effect, as with the fourth symbol 55.

  Further, BGM2 may be continuously output during the third operation promotion effect, and BGM2 may be stopped in response to the start of the blackout effect of FIG. 53 (G).

  Then, when the blackout effect ends, an SPSP development effect suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is performed (FIG. 53 (H)). Since the effects after FIG. 53 (H) are the same as those after FIG. 49 (H) (FIGS. 49 (H) to 50 (P)), the description thereof is omitted.

  Here, a modified example of the blackout effect before the SPSP development effect is performed will be described. FIG. 54 is a modification of FIG. 53 and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed immediately before the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 54, only screen views after FIG. 53 (E) are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 54, reach is established and N reach production is started (FIG. 54E). When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, a blackout effect is performed (FIG. 54 (F)). At the timing when this blackout effect is performed, the BGM 2 stops and enters a sound limited state (a silence state may be used, or only a relatively small sound may be output). After the blackout effect is performed, the third operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 54 (G)). During the third operation promotion effect, BGM2 remains stopped, and the third operation guidance sound is output. Then, the SPSP development effect is performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect (FIG. 54 (H)). The effects after FIG. 54 (H) are the same as those after FIG. 49 (H) (FIG. 49 (H) to FIG. 50 (P)).

  As described above, the third operation promotion effect may be performed after the blackout effect is performed. In this case, BGM2 may stop at the timing when the blackout effect is performed.

  FIG. 55 is a modification of FIG. 53 and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed during the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 55, only screen views after FIG. 53 (E) are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 55, reach is established and N reach production is started (FIG. 55 (E)). When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, a third operation promotion effect is performed and a blackout effect is performed (FIG. 55 (F), time point t6). For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the button image 83 and the effective period image 84 as the third operation promotion effect are displayed relatively bright, while the other images are dark. In addition, at the timing when the third operation promotion effect and the blackout effect are started, the BGM 2 stops and enters a sound restriction state (a silence state or a state where only a relatively small sound may be output). In the screen of FIG. 55 (F), any of the background image, the decorative symbol 51, the hold display 52, and the changing display 53 may be hidden, or the background image, the decorative symbol 51, and the hold display 52 may be hidden. , And the changing display 53 may be displayed darkly. Further, the decorative symbol 51 may be hidden or displayed dark, while the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed (the brightness is the same as before the blackout).

  Then, the SPSP development effect is performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect (FIG. 55 (G)). The effects after FIG. 55 (G) are the same as those after FIG. 49 (H) (FIG. 49 (H) to FIG. 50 (P)).

  Thus, BGM2 may stop at the timing when the third operation promotion effect and the blackout effect are performed.

  FIG. 56 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in the case where the blackout effect is performed without performing the third operation promotion effect and the SPSP reach effect is developed. In FIG. 56, only screen views after FIG. 53 (E) are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 56, reach is established and N reach production is started (FIG. 56E). When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, a blackout effect is performed (FIG. 56F). At the timing when this blackout effect is started, the BGM 2 stops and enters a sound limited state (a silence state may be used, or only a relatively small sound may be output).

  Then, after the blackout effect is performed, the SPSP development effect is performed (FIG. 56 (G)). The effects after FIG. 56 (G) are the same as those after FIG. 49 (H) (FIG. 49 (H) to FIG. 50 (P)).

  As described above, various production patterns have been described. However, these are merely examples, and various production patterns other than the above may be produced.

  For example, the first operation promotion effect, the notice effect, and the premier effect described above are performed in the change effect (the change effect based on the change patterns OP1-1 and 2 and the change patterns HP1-1 and 2) in which the N reach effect is performed. Also good. And BGM in these productions may be controlled as mentioned above. Further, in the variation effect (variation effect based on the variation patterns OP2-1 to 3 and the variation patterns HP2-1 to 3) in which the N reach effect and the SP reach effect are performed, the first operation promotion effect, the notice effect, and the premier effect described above. The third operation promotion effect, the SP development effect, and the second operation promotion effect may be performed. Moreover, there may be an effect pattern in which the SP development effect is performed after the third operation promotion effect. And BGM in these productions may be controlled as mentioned above.

  Further, in the variation effect (variation effect based on the variation patterns OP3-1 to 3 and the variation patterns HP3-1 to 3) in which the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are performed, the first operation promotion effect described above, A notice effect, a premiere effect, a third operation promotion effect, an SP development effect, and a second operation promotion effect may be performed. And BGM in these productions may be controlled as mentioned above.

  In addition, there is a fluctuating effect in which a jackpot notification effect is performed without a reach effect, and the first operation promotion effect, the notice effect, the premiere effect, and the second operation promotion effect before the jackpot notification effect described above in such a variable effect are provided. It may be done. And BGM in these productions may be controlled as mentioned above.

  For example, there is a bumping effect as an example in which a jackpot notification effect is performed without a reach effect. In the bumping effect, three decorative symbols (decorative symbols including numbers and character images) start to fluctuate, and the reach effect is suddenly made, and the big hit is notified without any reach effect. That is, in the bumping effect, the same kind of decorative design on the left and right stops and the reach establishment is notified, and the reach production that expects the same kind of design as the left and right decorative design to stop as the middle decorative design is performed, Suddenly, a jackpot is announced. For example, in the bumping effect, three similar types of decorative symbols stop simultaneously. When the bumping effect is performed, the BGM that has been output before the execution of the bumping effect may be stopped according to the execution of the bumping effect (simultaneously). On the other hand, when the bumping effect is performed, the BGM that has been output before the execution of the bumping effect does not have to stop in accordance with the execution of the bumping effect (simultaneously). In this case, the BGM may be continuously output even after the hit effect is started, or the BGM may be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the hit effect. The bumping effect is executed when a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 20 seconds) is selected. When the bumping effect is performed, the premier effect is easy to be executed. For example, the execution probability of the premier effect is higher than when the variation patterns OP4-1 to OP3-1 to OP3-1 to 3 having relatively long variation times are selected. Is expensive. In addition, when the impact effect is performed, the premium effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  The hit effect may include an effect in which three decorative symbols are arranged immediately after reach is established. In this case, during the reach in the case where the hit effect is performed, the decorative pattern may be in the same mode as the N reach effect (a mode that is not reduced and includes a character), or in a different mode. There may be. Further, during the reach in the case where the hit effect is performed, the same normal background image as before the reach may be displayed. Further, during the reach in the case where the hit effect is performed, the same BGM as before the reach may be output, or the same BGM as during the N reach effect may be output. That is, the bumping effect may be a jackpot effect without developing into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect. In this case, it can be said that the hit effect is an effect that is a big hit from the N reach effect, but it may be the same effect as the effect that is a big hit from the N reach effect, or from the effect that is a big hit from the N reach effect May be an effect with a short variation time, or an effect with a longer variation time than an effect that is a big hit from the N-reach effect.

  In addition, before the first operation promotion effect, the notice effect, the premiere effect, the third operation promotion effect, the SP development effect, the SPSP development effect, the second operation promotion effect, etc. described above are suggested, these effects are suggested. Production may be performed.

  In the above description, the above-described effects are performed during one special symbol change, and the control of the BGM during the effects has been described. Each of the above effects may be performed over a plurality of special symbol variations. For example, based on the result of the prior determination, a continuous effect over a plurality of special symbols is performed. BGM is output in the continuous performance. In addition, the first operation promotion effect, the notice effect, the premier effect, and the third operation promotion effect described above may be executed during the continuous effect, and BGM may be continuously output during the execution of these effects. Further, during the continuous production of the first mode, the development production that develops into the continuous production of the second mode with higher expectation than the first mode is performed, and the BGM being output is stopped when the development production is executed. May be. Further, before the development effect, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation may be performed, and the BGM may be stopped when the operation promotion effect is executed.

  In the above description, an example in which a blackout effect is performed when developing into an SPSP reach effect has been described. However, the background image and decorative symbols are not easily visible or cannot be visually recognized (not concealed). ) Any production may be performed as long as it is production. For example, a whiteout effect in which a white image is displayed on the entire screen may be performed. In addition, for example, a predetermined image that covers at least a part of the background image (for example, an image simulating a door or a shutter) is displayed on the foremost layer, so that at least a part of the background image is concealed. May be performed. Also, a freeze effect that stops the movement of the entire screen may be performed. During the freeze effect, the movement of the image displayed on the screen stops, the BGM is also stopped (or paused), and the sound is restricted. When the freeze effect ends, the BGM may be reproduced and output from the beginning, or may be reproduced and output from the reproduction position immediately before the freeze effect. Further, during the freeze effect, the BGM is reproduced internally, but the volume value may be set to “0”, and the volume value may be restored when the freeze effect ends.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, BGM is output during the variation effect according to the variation of the special symbol. The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a first effect (notice effect, premier effect, first operation promotion effect, etc.) and second effect (hit notification effect, second operation promotion effect, SPSP development effect, third operation promotion effect, etc.) can be executed. When the first effect (notice effect, premier effect, etc.) is executed, BGM is continuously reproduced and output during the first effect. On the other hand, BGM stops when the second effect is executed.

  Thereby, both when the first effect is executed during the changing effect and when it is not executed, the effect can be advanced in accordance with the BGM. Moreover, since BGM stops when the 2nd production is performed, the 2nd production can be emphasized and a player's attention can be turned to the 2nd production. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed as the second effect, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized. Since the BGM stops immediately before the jackpot notification effect is performed, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. In addition, when the SPSP development effect is performed as the second effect, the SPSP development effect can be emphasized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the announcement effect and the premier effect are executed, and BGM is continuously output during the first operation promotion effect. For this reason, when the first operation promotion effect is executed or not, the effect can be advanced in accordance with the BGM.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect (notice effect, premier effect, first operation promotion effect) may be performed when the first time has elapsed since the start of BGM reproduction, or the second time has elapsed. Sometimes it is done. That is, the first effect is started at a random playback position in the BGM. On the other hand, the second effect (a jackpot notification effect, a second operation promotion effect, etc.) is started at a fixed third time from the start of BGM reproduction. That is, the second effect is started at a fixed playback position in the BGM.

  Thereby, for example, since the jackpot notification effect starts at a fixed playback position in the BGM, the player can predict the timing when the jackpot notification effect is performed by music, and the player expects the player as the music progresses. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the notice effect and the premier effect are started at random playback positions in the BGM, it is impossible to predict when it will occur, and it is possible to make the effect surprising and improve the interest. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed third time varies depending on the variation pattern. For example, when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected, the third time is relatively long. When a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is selected, the third time is relatively small. short. As described above, since the fixed position where the BGM stops depends on the variation time, the player can recognize the length of the variation time (that is, the degree of expectation) depending on how far the music has advanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the type of BGM during the SPSP reach production varies depending on the variation pattern, and the type of BGM during the production before reach varies depending on the stage (production mode). For this reason, the pattern of the combination of BGM in the pre-reach production and the BGM in the SPSP reach production can be increased, and the production can have diversity.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect (the notice effect, the premier effect, etc.) is performed using a predetermined number of effect means (the liquid crystal display device 5, the panel lamp 25), and the second effect (a jackpot notification effect, etc.). ) Is produced by using more production means (liquid crystal display device 5, panel lamp 25, movable accessory 7) than a predetermined number. For example, in the last jackpot notification effect of the variation effect, since a relatively flashy effect is performed using more effect means, the interest is improved. On the other hand, for example, when performing a premier effect in the middle of a fluctuating effect, the player tends not to be interested in the subsequent effect if the effect is performed too flashy. However, in the present embodiment, in the premier effect in the middle of the variable effect, the effect is performed using relatively few effect means, so that the player's interest can be continued. Further, by continuing the BGM during the first production in the middle of the variation production, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production is continuing, and to easily direct the player's attention to the subsequent production.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control unit 130]
Next, details of the effect control based on various commands from the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control unit 130. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the effect control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 57 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption. In the following description, it is assumed that the processing shown in FIGS. 57 to 60 is performed by the effect control unit 130, but part or all of these processes are performed by the effect control unit 130, the image sound control unit 140, and the lamp control. It may be executed by any of the units 150.

  The effect control unit 130 (the CPU 131 thereof) first executes command reception processing (step S1001). The command reception process of step S1001 is a process of controlling the presentation based on various commands from the game control unit 100. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the contents of the effect according to the received command, and determines the determined effect based on the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. A command to be executed is generated and set in the RAM 133. Details of the command reception processing in step S1001 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1001, the effect control unit 130 performs a command transmission process of transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, a command for starting the variation effect set in the process of step S1001 and a command for ending the variation effect are transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the image sound control unit 140 produces an effect by image display, sound output, and the like, and the lamp control unit 150 operates the movable accessory 7, lights the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, the production button 26 and the production lever 28. Etc. are controlled.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes a transfer process (step S1003). Specifically, when receiving the control command from the image sound control unit 140, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150. For example, the control command from the image sound control unit 140 includes a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, a control command for operating the effect lever 28, a panel lamp 25 and a control command for causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light. Further, when receiving the control command from the lamp control unit 150, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the image sound control unit 140. Control commands from the lamp controller 150 include a control command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated, a control command indicating that the effect lever 28 has been operated, and the like. A control command is transmitted and received between the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130, so that the movable role is synchronized with the image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The object 7 operates or an image is displayed in response to an operation on the effect button 26 and the effect lever 28.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG.

  First, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the game control unit 100 has been received (step S1301). When it determines with having received the hold command (step S1301: YES), the production control unit 130 executes the hold command process (step S1302). Details of the pending command processing will be described later.

  When the process of step S1302 is executed, or when it is determined that the hold command is not received (step S1301: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not a variation start command is received (step S1303). ).

  When the change start command is received (step S1303: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the change start command process (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the effect control unit 130 determines the content of the change effect according to the change of the special symbol based on the received change start command, and sends it to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. A command for executing the variation effect is generated. The command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process in step S1002, and the variation effect is executed. Details of the change start command processing will be described later.

  When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that a variation start command has not been received (step S1303: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether a variation stop command has been received (step S1303). S1305).

  When the change stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the change stop command process (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 transmits a change effect end command for ending the change effect to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, for example, the decorative symbol 51 that is variably displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 5 is completely stopped, and the variation effect ends.

  When the process of step S1306 is executed, or when it is determined that the change stop command has not been received (step S1305: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether an opening command has been received (step S1307). ).

  When the opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the effect control unit 130 performs an opening process (step S1308). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines the opening effect based on the opening command transmitted when the jackpot is won, and causes the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect.

  When the process of step S1308 is executed, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (step S1307: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether an ending command has been received (step S1309). .

  When the ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes an ending process (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

  When the process of step S1310 is executed or when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (step S1309: NO), the effect control unit 130 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Holding command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command process in step 1302 of FIG. The effect control unit 130 first updates the number of reserved special symbol determinations stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S1320). Specifically, when a hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is updated to “1” and a hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. If it is, the number of suspensions of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”.

  Next, the production control unit 130 obtains prior determination information included in the received hold command (step S1321).

  Next, the effect control unit 130 determines by lottery whether or not to perform the advance determination effect based on the advance determination information (step S1322). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the hold display 52 to a display mode with a higher expectation than normal and a change scenario as the pre-determination effect. For example, it is determined whether or not to change the hold display 52 related to the winning at the start opening this time to a mode with high expectation at the time of winning, whether or not to change in the variation of the special symbol after the next. In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform a continuous effect over a plurality of special symbol variations as a prior determination effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines a winning sound when displaying the hold display 52 related to the winning at the current start opening (step S1323). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines a different winning sound according to the color of the hold display 52 determined in step S1322.

  Next, the production control unit 130 sets a hold increase command based on the results of the processes in steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting the hold increase command to the image sound control unit 140, the hold display 52 related to the winning at the current start port is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 in the display mode determined in step S1322, The winning sound determined in step S1323 is output.

[Variation start command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command process in step 1304 of FIG.

  The effect control unit 130 analyzes the received variation start command (step S1340). This variation start command includes symbol information (whether or not jackpot, jackpot symbol, etc.) indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the symbol information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol. It includes winning start information indicating whether it is related to the determination, information on the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The effect control unit 130 can specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the change start command. That is, whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type and variation pattern (variation time) of the jackpot can be specified. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

  When the change start command is analyzed, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect pattern indicating the content of the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1341). Here, a rough flow of the variation effect is determined. Specifically, the effect control unit 130, based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, presence / absence of reach effect, type of reach effect, presence / absence and type of SP development effect, SPSP The presence / absence and type of the development effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-variation effect, the type of the decorative symbol constituting the reach symbol, the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined. Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the second operation promotion effect that is performed immediately before the winning notification effect (the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect) based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. To do. In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the third operation promotion effect that is performed immediately before the development effect (SP development effect or SPSP development effect), based on the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 performs lottery using the effect random number, whether or not to perform various notice effects or the like when the changing effect by the effect pattern determined in the process of step S1341 is performed, and Then, the content of the notice effect or the like is determined (step S1342). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the above-described notice effect (effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit) based on the effect pattern, the type of the notice effect, and the timing for executing the notice effect. In addition to determining, whether to execute the first operation promotion effect, the timing for executing the first operation promotion effect, and the like are determined. Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the premier effect based on the effect pattern, the type of the premier effect, the timing for executing the premier effect, and the like, and whether or not to execute the first operation promotion effect. Or the timing etc. which perform a 1st operation promotion effect are determined. Note that the effect control unit 130 has a higher probability of determining that the premier effect is executed as the variation time of the special symbol is shorter.

  Next, the effect control unit 130 sets, in the RAM 133, a variable effect start command for instructing execution of a variable effect according to the effect pattern determined in the processes of steps S1341 and S1342 (step S1343). This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Thereby, the determined variation effect (effect performed during the variation of the special symbol including the reach effect, the notice effect, etc.) is executed by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1343, the effect control unit 130 subtracts “1” from the number of suspensions stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

  In addition to the processing described above, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect mode (stage) based on the received variation start command. The effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, whether or not to change the effect mode (stage) by performing a lottery using the effect random number. To decide. For example, as the predetermined condition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the number of times the special symbol has changed since the transition to the current stage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, or a specific effect (for example, SPSP) in the immediately preceding variable effect. It is determined whether or not (reach production) has been executed. When it is determined that the stage is to be changed, a fluctuating effect is executed using a background image, BGM, decorative design, or the like corresponding to the determined stage.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Unit 140]
Next, an example of the configuration of the image sound control unit 140 will be described. FIG. 61 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control unit 140.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the image sound control unit 140 includes a CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, a VRAM 145, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 146, a signal output unit 147, an input. An output unit 148 and an acoustic ROM 149 are provided.

  The CPU 141 stores image data stored in a CGROM (not shown) with respect to the VDP 144 based on programs stored in the control ROM 144, various tables such as a display list creation table, commands received from the effect control unit 130, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 5 is instructed to display an image based on the above. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  The display list consists of a group of commands for instructing drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, rotation angle, transmittance, etc. These parameters are included. The display list creation table is a table used for creating this display list.

  Further, the CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 146 to output sound based on the sound data stored in the sound ROM 149 from the speaker 24. In the acoustic ROM 149, the acoustic data corresponding to each of the above-described BGM 1 to 5, the acoustic data corresponding to the reach establishment sound, the acoustic data corresponding to the voice of the character 65, the acoustic data corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60, the first Acoustic data corresponding to one operation guidance sound, acoustic data corresponding to the second manipulation guidance sound, acoustic data corresponding to the third manipulation guidance sound, acoustic data corresponding to the SP development sound, acoustic data corresponding to the SPSP development sound, Acoustic data corresponding to the jackpot notification sound, acoustic data corresponding to various other sound effects, and the like are stored. Each acoustic data is stored as one file. The sound DSP 146 performs sound reproduction processing (decoding) based on the sound data stored in the sound ROM 149 and outputs the sound to the outside via the speaker 24. Further, the CPU 141 controls the sound volume when outputting the sound.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 146 are an acoustic ROM 149 for storing various acoustic data related to sound such as music, characters, etc. of BGM, sound effects, etc., an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 146, and an amplifier. Has been. The acoustic DSP 146 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 149 to the SDRAM, executes data processing to generate an acoustic signal, and outputs the generated acoustic signal to the speaker 24 (via the amplifier). . The amplifier adjusts the volume according to an output volume (described later) designated by the CPU 141 and outputs an acoustic signal to the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 142 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables, and the like.

  The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM stores effect data necessary for executing a change effect accompanying a change display of a special symbol, an effect accompanying a jackpot game, and the like. This CGROM is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of Note that only part of the image data stored in the CGROM may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. The CGROM that stores image data and the acoustic ROM 149 that stores acoustic data may be the same storage unit.

  The VRAM 145 is an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, and the like. In the present embodiment, drawing processing by double buffering is performed.

  The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the CPU 141. The expanded storage area stores image data expanded after being read from the CGROM. The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5.

  The VDP 144 expands the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM, and stores the expanded image data in the expanded storage area. The VDP 144 performs a drawing process on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the expanded storage area based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. The VDP 144 also generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the liquid crystal display device 5.

  The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the CPU 141 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second interval) for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). For example, the signal output unit 147 may output a predetermined signal at a constant time interval. The CPU 141 executes different processing when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147 and when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. The relationship between the predetermined signal output by the signal output unit 147 and the effect controlled by the CPU 141 will be described later.

  The input / output unit 148 receives a command from the effect control unit 130 or transmits a command to the effect control unit 130. The input / output unit 148 is connected to the CPU 141.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the VDP 144 is responsible for drawing control and the acoustic DSP 146 is responsible for sound control related to sound reproduction. However, in other embodiments, the VDP is responsible for both drawing control and sound control. Various configurations may be adopted. In this case, there is no need to separately provide an acoustic DSP. Further, the signal output unit 147 may be incorporated in another part instead of an independent circuit. For example, the VDP 144 or the CPU 141 may also serve as the signal output unit 147.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control unit 140. The image sound control unit 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 62 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the image sound control unit 140 (the CPU 141 thereof) determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the effect control unit 130 (step S1401). When receiving the change effect start command, the image sound control unit 140 starts the change effect according to the content of the change effect included in the change effect start command (step S1402). Thereby, the fluctuating effect is started in the liquid crystal display device 5. In addition, a sound related to the variation effect is output from the speaker 24. The variation production start command includes information on what kind of image is displayed at what timing from the start of variation of the special symbol and what kind of sound is output.

  When the process of step S1402 is executed, or when it is determined NO in step S1401, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not the changing effect is being executed (step S1403). When the changing effect is being executed (step S1403: YES), the image sound control unit 140 executes the changing effect processing (step S1404). Details of the processing during the changing effect will be described later.

  When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1403, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not a variable effect end command is received (step S1405). When the change effect end command is received (step S1405: YES), the image sound control unit 140 ends the change effect (step S1406). Specifically, the image sound control unit 140 stops the decoration symbol 51 displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Note that the image sound control unit 140 does not stop the BGM 1 that is being output even when the variation effect end command is received from the effect control unit 130.

  In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 62, the image sound control unit 140 performs processing related to a hold command, processing related to an opening effect, processing related to a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game, processing related to an ending effect, and the like. Thereby, the hold display 52 is displayed, an opening effect is executed, a jackpot game effect is executed, or an ending effect is executed.

[Processing during variation effect by image sound control unit 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the processing during fluctuating effect in step S1404 will be described. FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the changing effect processing in step 1404 of FIG. In the following, a process in a case where the variation effect shown in FIG. 44 (the variation effect developed from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect) is determined based on the change pattern OP4-1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the image sound control unit 140 performs a drawing process (step S1420). Specifically, the VDP 144 generates an image and stores it in the frame buffer. Then, the image stored in the frame buffer is output to the liquid crystal display device 5 and displayed. By performing drawing processing at regular time intervals, a moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. The image sound control unit 140 generates an image according to the variation effect (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the variation of the special symbol according to the number of frames or the elapsed time from the start of the variation effect. Output. That is, when the content of the variation effect is determined by the effect control unit 130 (that is, at the start of the variation), what image is generated at what frame (after several seconds) from the start of the variation effect, and the liquid crystal display device 5 Whether to output to is determined. In addition, at the time of starting the change, what kind of image is generated and output in response to the operation of the operation means (the effect button 26 or the effect lever 28) from which frame the change effect starts. , At the beginning of the change. Then, the image sound control unit 140 performs a predetermined image drawing process at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image related to the first operation promotion effect at time t5 (for example, 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at the time point t1. Specifically, when the operation on the effect button 26 is performed during the operation effective period of the first operation promotion effect (for example, between 5 seconds and 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the operation information is displayed in the lamp control unit 150. (Via the effect control unit 130) to the image sound control unit 140. The image sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at t1 when the operation information is input. Alternatively, the image sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at t1, which is the timing at which the operation effective period of the first operation promotion effect has elapsed (for example, 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation). In addition, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image (see, for example, FIG. 49E) indicating reach establishment at time T1 (for example, 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation). In addition, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image (see, for example, FIG. 49H) showing the SPSP development effect at time T2 (for example, 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation). In addition, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image related to the second operation promotion effect (for example, see FIG. 50K) at time t2 (for example, 70 seconds after the start of variation).

  Here, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image sound control unit 140 generates and outputs an image determined at the start of variation (determined by the effect control unit 130). On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 does not generate the image determined at the start of the change (determined by the effect control unit 130). In this case, the image sound control unit 140 may generate and output another image different from the image determined at the start of the change (determined by the effect control unit 130). For example, when it is determined to output the image of the premier character 60 that suggests that the jackpot is determined at the time t1, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image sound control unit 140 The image of the premier character 60 is output at time t1. On the other hand, even when it is determined to output the image of the premier character 60 that suggests the determination of the big hit at the time t1, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image acoustic control is performed. The unit 140 does not output the image of the premier character 60 at the time point t1. In this case, the image sound control unit 140 may output an image that does not suggest the possibility of jackpot (an image that cannot recognize the possibility of jackpot).

  In this way, by performing different display control when the predetermined signal is input and when the predetermined signal is not input, it is possible to give a variety of effects.

  Subsequent to step S1420, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether it is a voice control timing (step S1421). Here, it is determined whether or not it is time to start outputting the sound and whether or not it is time to control the volume of the sound being output.

  When it determines with YES in step S1421, the image sound control part 140 performs a sound control process (step S1422). The details of the sound control processing in step S1422 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the sound control processing in step S1422 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to start outputting a new sound (step S1441). As described above, at the start of variation, what frame (after a few seconds) what sound is output from the start of the variation effect, what number of frames from the start of the variation effect, the operation means (the effect button 26 or the effect) It is determined what sound is output in response to the operation on the lever 28). If YES is determined in step S1441, the image sound control unit 140 starts reproduction processing of predetermined sound data (step S1442).

  For example, if it is determined at the time t1 that the image of the premier character 60 is output at the time t1 and the reproduction of the acoustic data A1 corresponding to the sound of the premier character 60 is started at the time of the change, YES in step S1441. It is determined. In step S <b> 1422, the image sound control unit 140 starts reproduction processing (decoding) of the sound data A <b> 1 corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60. Specifically, the CPU 141 of the image sound control unit 140 instructs the sound DSP 146 to reproduce the sound data A1. In response to the instruction, the acoustic DSP 146 reads the acoustic data A1 and starts reproducing the voice of the premier character 60. Thereafter, the acoustic DSP 146 continues to reproduce the acoustic data A1 until the reproduction time of the acoustic data A1 ends without being instructed by the CPU 141. For example, when the reproduction time of the acoustic data A1 is 3 seconds, the acoustic DSP 146 continues to reproduce the acoustic data A1 until 3 seconds have elapsed since the reproduction of the acoustic data A1 was started.

  Further, for example, when the production control unit 130 determines to start the reproduction of BGM1 at the start of fluctuation, YES is determined in step S1441 at the start of fluctuation. In this case, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data B1 corresponding to BGM1 in step S1442. Thereafter, the acoustic DSP 146 continues to reproduce the acoustic data B1 until the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 ends without being instructed by the CPU 141. Further, when instructing the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 corresponding to BGM1, the CPU 141 may instruct the acoustic DSP 146 to repeat BGM1 (that is, repeat the reproduction of the acoustic data B1). In this case, when the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 corresponding to BGM1 is completed, the acoustic DSP 146 starts reproducing the acoustic data B1 from the beginning again. Further, when the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 is finished, the CPU 141 may instruct to start the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 from the top again.

  Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441, for example, at the timing (T1) when reach is established. In step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data A2 corresponding to the reach establishment sound. As a result, the acoustic DSP 146 starts reproducing the acoustic data A2, and a reach establishment sound is output from the speaker 24.

  Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the reach is established. In step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data B2 corresponding to BGM2.

  Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at the timing (T3) when the SPSP development effect ends and the SPSP reach effect starts. In step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data B4 corresponding to BGM4.

  As described above, the image sound control unit 140 starts to reproduce the sound data corresponding to the sound when it is time to output the sound. When the sound is output in synchronization with the display of the image, the display start timing of the image and the output start timing of the sound are synchronized, and after the sound output is started, the sound DSP 146 finishes reproducing the sound data. Until the sound data is reproduced. That is, in this embodiment, when sound is output in synchronization with image display, the start timing is synchronized, but the sound and image are not synchronized for each frame. As another control method, sound and image may be synchronized for each frame.

  When the process of step S1442 is executed, or when it is determined NO in step S1441, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to adjust the sound volume (step S1443). When it determines with YES in step S1443, the image sound control part 140 performs volume adjustment (step S1444).

  For example, when another sound (for example, the voice of the premier character 60) is output during the output of the BGM1, when the control for reducing the volume of the BGM1 is performed, the image sound control unit 140 outputs the sound. It is determined YES in step S1443 at the timing. In this case, the image sound control unit 140 starts reproduction of the sound data A corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60 in step S1442, and controls the volume of BGM1 in step S1444.

Here, the volume will be described. The sound volume of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is determined as follows.
Sound data itself As described above, the image sound control unit 140 (the sound ROM 149) stores sound data corresponding to each sound. The magnitude of the sound that the data (the sound) itself has is determined by the amplitude of the waveform.
Basic volume value The basic volume value is a recommended volume value when reproducing the above-described acoustic data, and is defined for each acoustic data. The basic volume value is set by the game machine developer and is not changed by, for example, the player after the game machine is shipped. Basically, each sound data is defined to have the same basic volume value for the sound related to the production and the sound related to the error sound. For example, when the volume value is set in the range of “0” to “10”, “5” is set as the basic volume value.
Channel volume value The channel volume value is a volume value designated for each channel (described later). The channel volume value is specified when the image sound control unit 140 (CPU 141 thereof) increases or decreases the volume.
Master volume value The master volume value is a volume value that is adjusted by the player. For example, when the left key of the production key 27 is pressed by the player, the master volume value is set to a small value, and when the right key of the production key 27 is pressed, the master volume value is set to a large value. Is set.

Then, the basic volume value is converted into the channel volume value, and the output volume is determined as in the following equation.
Output volume = (channel volume value) x master volume value

  Here, channels used for sound output control will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of virtual channels are provided for sound output control. For example, six channels (1ch to 6ch) are provided as error sound channels used for outputting error sounds. In addition, 24 channels (7 to 30 ch) are provided as effect sound channels used for outputting effect sounds (sounds related to effects such as BGM, character voice, and sound effects). One sound (one acoustic data) is output using one channel, and two or more sounds are not simultaneously output using the same channel. Further, the effect sound is not output using the error sound channel. When outputting a certain error sound, the image sound control unit 140 outputs an error sound using an empty channel among the error sound channels 1ch to 6ch. Moreover, when outputting a certain effect sound, the image sound control part 140 outputs using the channel which is vacant among the effect sound channels 7ch-30ch.

  When the production sound is output using a certain channel, a channel volume value is designated for that channel. Basically, a channel volume value that is the same as (or corresponds to) the basic volume value set in the acoustic data is set. When the image sound control unit 140 changes the sound volume in step S1444, the image sound control unit 140 changes the channel volume value related to the sound. For example, when the image sound control unit 140 outputs BGM1 and decreases the volume of the BGM1 according to the execution of the notice effect, the channel volume value related to the BGM1 is changed from “5” to “3”, for example. For example, when the BGM 1 is muted, the channel volume value related to the BGM 1 is changed from “5” to “0”, for example. In addition, when the volume of the BGM 1 is decreased (or increased) with time, the image sound control unit 140 decreases (or increases) the channel volume value related to BGM 1 with the passage of time.

  When all of the effect sound channels 7ch to 30ch are in use (when 24 kinds of effect sounds are being output at the same time), when the image sound control unit 140 outputs another new effect sound, it is being output. Any effect sound is canceled, and the channel used for outputting the canceled effect sound is used for outputting the newly generated effect sound. Specifically, priority is given to each effect sound. The priority is given to the sound by the developer of the gaming machine 1 in advance. The priority of the effect sound is set in the range of 1 to 5, for example. For example, the priority of BGM1 may be set to the lowest “1”, and the priority of the effect sound related to the premier effect or the notice effect (the sound of the predetermined character 65 or the premier character 60) may be set to “3”. . In this case, for example, when 24 types of effect sounds including BGM1 are being output at the same time during the pre-reach effect, the sound of a predetermined character 65 is output in response to the start of the notice effect, which is more predetermined than BGM1. The voice of the character 65 is output with priority. The priority of BGM may be set to a relatively high value.

  In addition, when a new production sound is output when all production sound channels are in use, the new production sound has a priority lower than the priority of all the production sounds currently being output. The effect sound may not be output.

  When the process of step S1444 is executed or when it is determined NO in step S1443, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to stop the BGM being output (step S1445). When it determines with YES in step S1445, the image sound control part 140 stops BGM being output (step S1446).

  For example, the image sound control unit 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM 1 at the timing when reach is established (FIG. 49 (E)). In addition, the image sound control unit 140 stops the reproduction of BGM2 at the timing of starting the SPSP development effect (FIG. 49 (H)). In addition, the image sound control unit 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM 4 at a timing immediately before the second operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 50 (K)).

  Here, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input in the process of step S1442, the image sound control unit 140 generates a sound determined at the start of the change (determined by the effect control unit 130). Output. On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 does not output the sound determined at the start of the change (determined by the effect control unit 130). In this case, the image sound control unit 140 may output another sound different from the sound determined at the start of the change (determined by the effect control unit 130). For example, if it is determined to output the voice of the premier character 60 at the time t1, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image sound control unit 140 causes the premier character 60 to be output at the time t1. Is output. On the other hand, even if it is determined that the voice of the premier character 60 is output at time t1, if the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image sound control unit 140 is set to At this time, the voice of the premier character 60 is not output. In this case, the image sound control unit 140 may output a sound that does not suggest the possibility of jackpot. Note that the image sound control unit 140 may output the sound (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation even when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. For example, when it is determined to output the voice of the premier character 60 at the time point t1, the image sound control unit 140 does not input the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 but the premier character 60 at the time point t1. May be output.

  Further, for example, when the sound output of the predetermined character 65 is determined at the time t1 during the output of the BGM1 at the time t1 when the image acoustic control unit 140 is determined to start the fluctuation, When the signal is input, BGM1 is continuously output. On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input, BGM1 is not continuously output. That is, even when it is determined in advance that BGM1 is continuously output at time t1, BGM1 is not continuously output when a predetermined signal is not input at time t1. Note that the image sound control unit 140 may continuously output BGM1 even when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input. When the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image sound control unit 140 continuously outputs BGM1, while the sound (for example, the character related to the other notice effect defined at the start of the fluctuation). ) Is not required to be output.

  Also, the image sound control unit 140 adjusts the volume when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input in the process of step S1444, while when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. Do not adjust the volume.

  In addition, the image sound control unit 140 is input even when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, when stopping the BGM being output at a predetermined timing is determined at the start of the fluctuation. Even when not, the BGM is stopped at the predetermined timing.

  In this way, by performing different sound control when a predetermined signal is input and when a predetermined signal is not input, it is possible to give a variety of effects. This is the end of the description of the processing in FIG.

  Note that a sound determined at the start of fluctuation may be output regardless of whether or not a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not it is the control timing of the rendering means (movable accessory 7, panel lamp 25, frame lamp 37, rendering button 26, rendering lever 28, etc.) controlled by the lamp controller 150. Is determined (step S1423). As described above, as the contents of the variation effect determined at the start of the variation, at which timing the movable accessory 7 is operated, the effect button 26 is controlled (operation, light emission, vibration, etc.), or the effect lever 28 is controlled. (Operation, light emission, vibration, etc.), whether the panel lamp 25 emits light, or the frame lamp 37 emits light is determined. For example, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether it is the control timing of the movable accessory 7 or the like controlled by the lamp control unit 150 based on the number of frames or the elapsed time from the start of change.

  When it determines with YES by step S1423, the image sound control part 140 transmits a control command to the effect control part 130 (step S1424). The control command includes a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, a control command for operating the effect lever 28, a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 to emit light, There are control commands for causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light. When the effect control unit 130 receives these control commands from the image sound control unit 140, the effect control unit 130 transfers these control commands to the lamp control unit 150. Accordingly, the movable accessory 7 operates, the effect button 26 operates, the effect lever 28 operates, the panel lamp 25 emits light, and the frame lamp 37 emits light.

  For example, the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 (via the effect control unit 130) at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7. In addition, the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light to the lamp control unit 150 at the timing for causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light.

  Here, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input in the process of step S1424, the image sound control unit 140 is determined at the start of variation (determined by the effect control unit 130). Is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. For example, when a predetermined signal is input at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 may or may not output the control command determined at the start of the fluctuation. For example, when a predetermined signal is not input at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 may or may not be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. Also good. If the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 even when a predetermined signal is not input, the movable accessory 7 operates. That is, in this case, regardless of whether or not a predetermined signal is input, the movable accessory 7 operates in a manner determined at the start of fluctuation. If the image sound control unit 140 does not transmit a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 when a predetermined signal is not input, the movable accessory 7 is determined at the start of the fluctuation. Does not work in the same way. In this case, the movable accessory 7 may operate in another manner.

  The same applies to the light emission of the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37. That is, when a predetermined signal is input, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the manner determined at the start of the change (determined by the effect control unit 130). On the other hand, when a predetermined signal is not inputted, the image sound control unit 140 may transmit a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light to the lamp control unit 150 or not. . When a predetermined signal is not input, if a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 to emit light is not transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 does not emit light. In this case, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may emit light in another manner. Even when a predetermined signal is not input, if a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 to emit light is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 responds to the control command. Emits light.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the BGM is output during the changing effect, the first effect (the notice effect or the premier effect) that continues the BGM being output, and the BGM that is being output is stopped. Two effects (development effects and jackpot notification effects) are performed. Since the BGM is continuously output when the first effect is performed on the assumption that the effect progresses according to the BGM flow, the first effect can be executed without breaking the BGM flow. Further, for example, when the jackpot notification effect indicating the determination of the jackpot is executed, the BGM stops, so that the player's attention can be directed to the jackpot notification effect.

[Modification]
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, The following forms may be sufficient.

  For example, in the above embodiment, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, and BGM5 are stored in the acoustic ROM 149 as separate acoustic data (acoustic file). For example, when switching from BGM2 to BGM3, reproduction of BGM2 is stopped (reproduction of acoustic data corresponding to BGM2 is terminated), and reproduction of acoustic data corresponding to BGM3 is started. Further, for example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed from the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the playback of the BGM 4 is stopped, the jackpot notification effect is performed, and the playback of the BGM 5 is started. In another embodiment, BGM 1 to 5 are stored in the acoustic ROM 149 as one acoustic data (acoustic file), and by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the acoustic data or changing the reproduction position, BGM may be output. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed from the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 4 may be temporarily stopped by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the sound data constituting the BGM 4 and the BGM 5. Then, a jackpot notification sound may be output in response to the execution of the jackpot notification effect, and then the BGM5 portion may be output by resuming reproduction of the sound data from the position where the sound data was temporarily stopped.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above-described effect and sound control are performed in the variation effect during the variation of the special symbol, but the same control as described above is performed in the effect during the jackpot game, not limited to the variation effect. May be. The same control may be performed regardless of whether the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state advantageous to the player, or the short-time gaming state.

  Moreover, the various values (for example, variation time, probability, etc.) exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

  In addition, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example. However, the present invention is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

[Modified example of decorative design]
Moreover, you may give the function which suggests the expectation degree with respect to jackpot with respect to the element regarding the color of a decoration design (specifically number). For example, an image representing a number of decorative symbols may be configured in different colors depending on the number. For example, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 10R probability variation, even symbols and odd symbols are selected as reach symbols (decorative symbols used for reach production. Two types of decorative symbols that stop right and left during reach production) On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 4R normal, the odd symbol may not be selected. In this case, it is possible to provide a function that suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the probability-changing gaming state with respect to the element related to the color of the decorative design. That is, for example, when SPSP reach production is performed, when an odd symbol (for example, 7 symbols) of a predetermined color is displayed as a reach symbol, an even symbol (for example, 2 symbols) other than the predetermined color is displayed as a reach symbol. It can be said that the degree of expectation to shift to a probabilistic gaming state is higher than the case where the game is played. In addition, when the expectation level for jackpots differs depending on the number of reach symbols, the expectation level for jackpots can be suggested by the color of the decorative symbols.

  Also, the numbers that make up the odd symbol may be different from the numbers that make up the even symbol, and the number of colors that make up the odd symbol may be multiple, or the numbers that make up the even symbol may be multiple. Good. For example, among the odd symbols, the number “7” constituting the 7 symbols is red and the color constituting the odd symbols other than the 7 symbols is green. The color may be blue (that is, a color other than red and green).

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of colors may be associated with one number constituting each decorative design. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the numbers that make up each decorative pattern, and in this order the jackpot expectation and the expectation for transitioning to the probable gaming state May be set in advance so as to increase. For example, the expectation is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd symbol than when the reach symbol is a white even symbol, and the expectation is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd symbol. (The jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be interested in the elements related to the color of the decorative design.

  Further, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for one number constituting each decorative design. For example, the character which is an additional display may differ for every number which comprises a decorative design, and several characters may be matched as an additional display with respect to one number. Specifically, the characters A to C which are the additional display of the seven symbols may not be the additional display of the decorative symbols indicating other numbers. For example, the jackpot expectation degree and the expectation degree for shifting to the probability variation gaming state may be set in advance in the order of characters A to C. For example, the degree of expectation is higher in the case where reach is established in the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character B is added than in the case where reach is established in the decorative pattern of the first mode in which the character A is added. The degree of expectation is higher when reach is established with the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character C is added (the jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be interested in the elements related to the additional display of the decorative symbols. Note that a plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the 1 to 9 symbols may be prepared in advance as the additional display. For example, characters A to C are prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the 1 to 9 symbols. May be.

  With reference to FIG.65 and FIG.66, the modification of the decoration design of a 1st aspect and a 2nd aspect is demonstrated. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the additional display displayed by adding to the numbers constituting the decorative design. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the decorative design of the first mode and the second mode.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern of the first aspect is configured by a number and a character that is an additional display corresponding to this number, and the decorative pattern of the second aspect is by a number without additional display. Composed. In the modification described with reference to FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, any one of the additional images A to C, which is an effect image different from the character, is used as the decorative design regardless of the form of the decorative design. It is always added to the numbers that make up. The additional images A to C are additional displays superimposed on the back side of the numbers constituting the decorative symbols in any of the decorative patterns of the first aspect and the second aspect.

  Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the character that is another additional display on the back side of the number (see FIG. 66 (A)). In addition, in the decorative pattern of the second aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the number (see FIG. 66B).

  The additional images A to C move or do not move in the same manner as the character that is the additional display. Specifically, the additional images A to C are, for example, when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is temporarily stopped and when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is changed to the decorative pattern of the second aspect (and In the opposite case, it swings so as to synchronize with the fine movement of the numbers constituting the decorative design. Further, when scrolling, the additional images A to C do not swing regardless of the speed. In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are still images, and the additional images A to C are not moved at all as in the case of the additional display character. In other embodiments, while the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, while the additional images A to C may move.

  The additional image A is an ocher image and is an additional display corresponding to an odd symbol other than the seven symbols (see FIG. 65A). The additional image B is a silver image having the same pattern as that of the additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to even symbols (see FIG. 65B). The additional display C is a golden image with a different pattern from the additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to 7 symbols.

  Since the type of the additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative design, it is possible to determine whether the number constituting the decorative design is an odd number, an even number, or “7” depending on the type of the additional image. Thus, for example, the element related to the color of the decorative design is blue compared to the case where the element related to the color of the decorative design (specifically, a number) is green and the additional image A (that is, an odd number other than 7 symbols). It can be suggested that in the case of the added image B (that is, even symbols), the expectation for jackpot and the expectation for shifting to the probability variation gaming state are higher. In addition, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative design is green and the additional image C (that is, 7 designs), the expectation for shifting to the jackpot expectation degree and the probability variation gaming state is higher than in the case of other combinations It can be suggested that the degree is high.

  Since the additional displays A to C are attached to the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the decorative symbol of the second aspect, the additional displays A to C are always displayed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variation display of the special symbol. The numbers constituting the decorative symbols are the same in the normal mode (in the normal game state) and the probability change mode (in the probability change game state), and the additional images A to C can be displayed. Thereby, a sense of unity can be given to these different production modes.

  Note that the additional image A and the additional image B may be images of different colors, or may be images in which some of them are the same and different in other parts.

  Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number constituting the decorative design. For example, when the additional image A or the additional image C is added to one number, the additional image C is more likely to be added as the reliability for the big hit is higher, and the additional image A is easier to be added as the reliability is lower. Good. Note that the additional image C is added when it is a big hit, but may not be added when it is lost.

  When such a decorative symbol is used, for example, before the reach is established, the BGM1 is output while the three decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed, and the character that is additionally displayed when the decorative symbol stops (or stops) on the left and right. When the movement stops, the reach establishment sound may be output and the BGM 1 may stop. During the N reach production after the reach is established, BGM2 is output, the decorative symbols on the left and right are stopped, and the additional display character does not move. Next, when developing from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect, the character that is the additional display moves, the SP development sound is output in synchronization with this movement, and the BGM 2 is stopped. That is, before and after the BGM is switched, the character that is the additional display of the decorative symbol may move so as to synchronize.

[Configuration of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effects]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that parentheses indicate correspondence with the embodiment, and are merely examples.

(Configuration 1)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to Configuration 1 has a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the design. A design control means for informing the result of the determination; an output means for outputting a sound; and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means has a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Can be executed, the second effect can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed, and during the first effect The reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first effect can be continued, and the output of the sound output before the execution of the second effect is stopped during the second effect.

  According to this configuration 1, when the first effect (for example, the notice effect, the premier effect, etc.) is executed, the output of the sound (for example, BGM1) is continued, while the second effect (for example, the jackpot notification effect, the development effect, for example). Etc.), the sound (for example, BGM4 etc.) is stopped. Thereby, for example, since the BGM is continuously output when the first effect is executed or not executed, the effect can be advanced according to the music flow, and the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, when the second effect is executed, the BGM that has been played until immediately before is stopped, so that the player can be concentrated on the second effect and the player's expectation can be enhanced, and the second effect can be emphasized.

  In the above-described configuration 1, the first effect and the second effect may be executed in one change of the symbol. In the configuration 1, the second effect may be an effect performed after the first effect. In the configuration 1, the second effect may be an effect with a higher expectation than the first effect. Further, during the first production, sound reproduction is continued internally, but sound output may be suppressed (the volume is reduced or the volume is set to “0”).

(Configuration 2)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to Configuration 2 has a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, to control output of sound output from the output means, and to execute a special game in the special game determination When determined, when executing the first effect pattern including the first number of finalized effects, and when performing the second effect pattern including the second number of finalized effects different from the first number of times. When the first effect pattern is executed, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the determined effect is stopped and the second effect is performed. When the pattern is executed, during the finalized effect before the second-numbered finalized effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the finalized effect. During the confirmed effect, the output of the sound that was output before execution of the confirmed effect is stopped.

  According to this configuration 2, even when the final number of times (for example, only the last jackpot notification effect) is determined, the second number of times (for example, the premier effect during the reach effect or during the reach effect, and the last jackpot notification) Even when performing the finalized production), the BGM is continuously output before the final notification production, so the production can be advanced according to the music flow, and the continuity of the production can be maintained. . In addition, since the BGM is stopped in any case in the final confirmed effect, the player can be concentrated on the final confirmed effect, and the final confirmed effect can be emphasized.

  In the configuration 2, the execution ratio of the second effect pattern may be lower than the execution ratio of the first effect pattern. For example, the execution ratio of the second effect pattern may be higher or lower than that of the first effect pattern. Further, the first effect pattern may be more easily executed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. The second effect pattern may be more easily executed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. Further, the second number may be greater than the first number. The first number may be one or more times, and the second number may be two or more times. Further, the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern may be selected according to the symbol variation time. For example, when the symbol variation time is the first time, the first effect pattern is selected (at a rate of 100%), and the symbol variation time is longer (or shorter) than the first time. In this case, the second performance pattern may be selected (at a rate of 100%).

(Configuration 3)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to Configuration 3 has a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, a confirmed effect suggesting that the special game is executed can be executed, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated can be executed, and the sound output from the output means If it is determined that the special game is to be executed in the special game determination, the first effect pattern including the first number of the final effects is executed. And when executing the second effect pattern including the determined effect of the second number of times different from the first number of times, and executing the first effect pattern, executing the first determined effect of the first number of times. If the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is performed and the output of the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped and the second effect pattern is executed, the second number of times. During the finalized effect before the finalized effect of the eye, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the finalized effect, and the operation promotion effect before executing the second finalized effect. And during the operation promotion effect, the output of the sound output before the operation promotion effect is executed is stopped.

  According to the configuration 3, in addition to the configuration 2, the following effects can be obtained. In other words, in any case of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, by performing an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation means immediately before the final confirmed effect (for example, the jackpot notification effect), The operation can be guided to the player, and the player can be prepared for the operation. Further, since a definite effect is performed according to the operation, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means. In addition, since the BGM is continuously played during execution of the finalized effect before the final finalized effect (for example, the pre-reach effect or the premier effect during the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. The operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the final confirmed effect, and the BGM is stopped during the operation promotion effect. Therefore, the player is kept quiet when the operation is performed, and the player is concentrated on the operation, and immediately before the final confirmed effect. The player can be thrilled. That is, since the operation of the operating means is promoted from a noisy state to a quiet state, it is possible to concentrate on the operation and amplify the feeling of throb for the operation.

  In the configuration 3, for example, the probability that the second effect pattern is executed may be higher or lower than the first effect pattern. Further, the first effect pattern may be more easily executed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. The second effect pattern may be more easily executed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter. Further, the second number may be greater than the first number. The first number may be one or more times, and the second number may be two or more times.

(Configuration 4)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to Configuration 4 has a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the design It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, a confirmed effect suggesting that the special game is executed can be executed, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated can be executed, and the sound output from the output means If it is determined that the special game is to be executed in the special game determination, the first effect pattern including the first number of the final effects is executed. And when executing the second effect pattern including the determined effect of the second number of times different from the first number of times, and executing the first effect pattern, executing the first determined effect of the first number of times. If the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is performed and the output of the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped and the second effect pattern is executed, the second number of times. During the finalized effect before the finalized effect of the eye, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the finalized effect, and the operation promotion effect before executing the second finalized effect. During the operation promotion effect, the output of the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped, and the execution probability of the second effect pattern is higher than the execution probability of the first effect pattern. Low.

  According to the configuration 4, in addition to the configuration similar to the configuration 3, the execution probability of the second effect pattern is lower than the execution probability of the first effect pattern. As a result, the same effects as those of the configuration 3 can be obtained, and it is possible to make it difficult to execute the confirmed effect during the output of the BGM, and the player can be directed to the BGM.

  In the configuration 4, the first operation promotion effect is performed before executing the finalization effect before the second-time finalization effect, and during the first operation promotion effect, the execution of the first operation promotion effect is performed. You may continue the reproduction process of the sound output from. The operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed before executing the first or second determination effect. In such a configuration, since the operation promotion effect is performed a plurality of times, the expectation can be increased step by step each time the operation is performed. In addition, the start timing of the first confirmed effect may be shifted depending on the operation timing during the first operation promotion effect, but since the BGM does not stop during the first operation promotion effect, the subsequent effects are performed along the music flow. It can be advanced and the continuity of production can be maintained. For example, on the premise that the SPSP reach effect is started at a certain timing in the BGM (for example, the start time of the rust portion), the SPSP reach effect is always performed at the same timing even if the operation timing during the first operation promotion effect is different. Can start. In addition, diversity in the number of executions of the operation promotion effect when it is determined that the game is a big hit, the range of the effect is widened, and an interesting gaming machine that is less likely to get bored can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be executed, when the first operation promotion effect is performed, the first operation guide sound is output, and when the second operation promotion effect is performed. May output a second operation guide sound different from the first operation guide sound. In this case, it is possible to recognize a confirmed effect that is executed in accordance with the operation by the operation guide sound. The second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound. When BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it is possible not to disturb the music. On the other hand, when BGM stops, a comparatively long 2nd operation guidance sound can be output and an interest property can be improved. Also, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different effects or the same effect. In addition, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that prompt operations on different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that prompt an operation on the same operation means, and may be different effects. In addition, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be more easily executed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is shorter. Further, the second number may be greater than the first number. The first number may be one or more times, and the second number may be two or more times.

(Configuration 5)
In the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, when the start condition is satisfied, the special game for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is determined, and the special game is stopped by changing the symbol and then stopping. It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a confirmed effect that suggests that the special game is executed, and based on a result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game is performed, It is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means, and when it is determined that the special game is executed in the special game determination, the first effect pattern including the final effect is displayed. And when executing the first effect pattern, the first effect pattern is output before the execution of the determined effect. In the case where the output of the sound that has been performed is stopped and the second effect pattern is executed, the playback process of the sound output before the execution of the notice effect can be continued during the notice effect, and the confirmed effect During, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the final effect is stopped.

  According to this configuration 5, since the sound (BGM) continues during the notice effect, the BGM can be stopped at the same timing when the notice effect is performed or not, even when the notice effect is performed. . While the BGM is continued during the notice effect, the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, when the confirmed effect is executed, the BGM is stopped to increase the feeling of throb, and the confirmed effect can be emphasized.

(Configuration 6)
In the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect, when the start condition is satisfied, the special game is determined by making a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and stopping after changing the design. It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a confirmed effect that suggests that the special game is executed, and it is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests a possibility that the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means that can be operated, and it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and in the special game determination When it is determined that the special game is to be executed, there are a case where the first effect pattern including the final effect is executed, and a case where the second effect pattern including the notice effect and the final effect is executed. When the pattern is executed, the operation promotion effect is executed before the finalized effect is executed. During the operation promotion effect, the output of the sound output before the operation promotion effect is executed is stopped, and the second When performing the production pattern, during the preliminary announcement production, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output from before the announcement production execution, execute the operation promotion production before executing the final production, During the operation promotion effect, output of the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped.

  According to this configuration 6, in addition to the same effects as configuration 5, since the operation promotion effect is performed before the finalized effect is executed, the operation can be guided to the player, and the player is prepared for the operation. be able to. Further, since a definite effect is performed according to the operation, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means. Further, since the BGM is continuously played during the execution of the notice effect (for example, the notice effect before the reach effect or during the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. In addition, since the operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the finalization effect and the BGM stops during the operation promotion effect, the player is kept quiet when the operation is performed, and the player is concentrated on the operation. Can be throbbing.

  In the configuration 6, the first operation promotion effect is performed before the notice effect is executed, and during the first operation promotion effect, the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect is performed. You may continue. Before executing the finalized effect, the operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed. In such a configuration, a notice effect is performed in the first operation, and a final effect is performed in the second operation. Therefore, expectations can be increased step by step each time the operation is performed. Further, in this configuration, BGM continues in the first operation promotion effect before the announcement effect with a relatively low expectation (for example, 10% to 50%), while the expectation effect with a high expectation (100%) before the confirmation effect. BGM stops in the second operation promotion effect. As a result, the continuity of the production can be emphasized before the performance with a low expectation (notification production) is performed, and the expectation can be further increased before the production with a high expectation (definite production). It is possible to balance the smooth flow of production and the improvement of euphoria.

  In the configuration in which the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be executed, when the first operation promotion effect is performed, the first operation guide sound is output, and when the second operation promotion effect is performed. May output a second operation guide sound different from the first operation guide sound. In this case, the second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound. When BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it is possible not to disturb the music. On the other hand, when BGM stops, a comparatively long 2nd operation guidance sound can be output and an interest property can be improved. Also, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different effects or the same effect. In addition, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that prompt operations on different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that prompt an operation on the same operation means, and may be different effects. In addition, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be easier (or difficult) to be performed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter.

(Configuration 7)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to Configuration 7 includes a determination unit that performs a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means determines whether the special game is based on the result of the special game determination. A notice effect that suggests the possibility of being performed is specified, and is based on the result of the special game determination, and is an effect that is different from the notice effect and suggests that a special game is likely to be performed. An effect can be executed, a specific suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is performed can be executed before the specific effect, and output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. Thus, during the notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the notice effect, and during the specific suggestion effect, the sound output before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. Stop output.

  According to this configuration, since the sound (BGM) continues during the notice effect, the case where the notice effect is performed or not is the same for the specific suggestion effect (for example, the SP development effect or the SPSP development effect). BGM can be stopped at the timing. In the notice effect, the continuity of the effect can be maintained by continuing the BGM, while in the specific suggestion effect, by stopping the BGM, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for developing to a specific effect with a high degree of expectation. Further, the expectation can be increased step by step from the notice effect to the specific suggestion effect, and the expectation can be further increased by stopping the BGM.

  In the configuration 7, the effect control unit may be capable of executing the notice effect and the specific effect in one change of the symbol, and executes the notice effect and the specific effect in the change of the one time. In this case, during the notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the notice effect is performed, and during the specific suggestion effect, the sound is output before the specific suggest effect is executed. Sound output may be stopped. In the configuration 7, the specific suggestion effect may be an effect suggesting the development to the specific effect and an effect that allows the player to recognize the type of the specific effect. Further, the specific suggestion effect may be a blackout effect or a switching effect indicating switching to the specific effect (effect indicating switching of the background image or the decorative design).

(Configuration 8)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to Configuration 8 includes a determination unit that performs a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping the game after changing the symbol. It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means determines whether the special game is based on the result of the special game determination. A notice effect that suggests the possibility of being performed is specified, and is based on the result of the special game determination, and is an effect that is different from the notice effect and suggests that a special game is likely to be performed. An operation promotion effect that can execute an effect, can execute a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect is performed before the specific effect, and prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated The sound output from the output means can be controlled, and when the first effect pattern including the specific effect is executed based on the result of the special game determination, There are times when the second effect pattern including the notice effect and the specific effect is executed. When the first effect pattern is executed, the operation promotion effect is executed before the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the operation promotion effect is executed. During the time when the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped and the second effect pattern is executed, the sound was output before the execution of the notification effect during the notification effect. The sound reproduction process can be continued, the operation promotion effect is executed before the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the output of the sound output before the operation promotion effect is stopped during the operation promotion effect To do.

  According to this configuration 8, in addition to the same effect as the configuration 7, in order to perform the operation promotion effect before executing the specific suggestion effect, the operation can be guided to the player, and the player is prepared for the operation. Can be made. In addition, since the specific suggestion effect is performed according to the operation, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means. Further, since the BGM is continuously played during the execution of the notice effect (for example, the notice effect before the reach effect or during the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. In addition, since the operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the specific suggestion effect and the BGM stops during the operation promotion effect, the player is kept quiet when the operation is performed, and the player is concentrated on the operation, and immediately before the specific suggestion effect. The player can be thrilled.

  In the configuration 8, the first operation promotion effect is performed before the notice effect is performed, and during the first operation promotion effect, the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect is performed. You may continue. The operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed before the specific suggestion effect is executed. In such a configuration, a notice effect is performed in the first operation, and a specific suggestion effect is performed in the second operation. Therefore, expectations can be increased step by step each time the operation is performed. Further, in this configuration, BGM continues in the first operation promotion effect before the notice effect with a relatively low expectation level, while BGM stops in the second operation promotion effect before the specific effect with a high expectation value. As a result, the continuity of the production can be emphasized before the performance with a low degree of expectation (notice production), and the expectation can be further increased before the production with a high expectation (specific production). It is possible to balance the smooth flow of production and the improvement of euphoria.

  In the configuration in which the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be executed, when the first operation promotion effect is performed, the first operation guide sound is output, and when the second operation promotion effect is performed. May output a second operation guide sound different from the first operation guide sound. In this case, the second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound. When BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it is possible not to disturb the music. On the other hand, when BGM stops, a comparatively long 2nd operation guidance sound can be output and an interest property can be improved. Also, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different effects or the same effect. In addition, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that prompt operations on different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that prompt an operation on the same operation means, and may be different effects. In addition, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be easier (or difficult) to be performed when the symbol variation time is longer than when the variation time is shorter.

(Configuration 9)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect is configured to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, to determine whether to execute a special game, and to stop the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. A design control means for informing the result of the determination; an output means for outputting a sound; and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means has a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. (E.g., a pre-reach effect or a notice effect during a reach effect) can be executed, and a second degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect based on the result of the special game determination. An effect (for example, the last jackpot notification effect, etc.) can be executed, and before executing the first effect, a first operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated can be executed, Second production Before the execution, it is possible to execute the second operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated, and to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the operation promotion effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, and during the second operation promotion effect, the output is performed before the execution of the second operation promotion effect. The output of the performed sound is stopped, the first effect sound can be output in the first operation promotion effect, and the second effect sound can be output in the second operation promotion effect.

  According to this configuration 9, the second effect sound is output in the second operation promotion effect immediately before the second effect, and the first effect sound is output in the first operation promotion effect immediately before the first effect. For example, when the second effect has a higher expectation than the first effect, the player's expectation can be increased by the second effect sound. Also, since the BGM stops during the second operation promotion effect, the second effect sound (for example, a sound larger than the first effect sound, a sound longer than the first effect sound, By outputting a flashy sound), the expectation is further increased, and a sharp production can be achieved and the interest can be improved.

  In the configuration 9, the effect control means can execute the first effect and the second effect in one change of the symbol, and the first effect and the second effect in one change of the symbol. In the case where two effects can be executed, during the first operation promotion effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, and during the second operation promotion effect. The output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second operation promotion effect may be stopped. The first effect sound may be output immediately before execution of the first operation promotion effect, may be output immediately after execution of the first operation promotion effect, or is output during execution of the first operation promotion effect. May be. The second effect sound may be output immediately before the execution of the second operation promotion effect, may be output immediately after the execution of the second operation promotion effect, or is output during the execution of the second operation promotion effect. May be. Also, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different effects or the same effect. In addition, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that prompt operations on different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that prompt an operation on the same operation means, and may be different effects. In addition, there are a time when a first effect pattern including the second effect is included without executing the first effect and a second effect pattern including the first effect and the second effect is executed during the symbol variation display. On the premise of this, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be more easily (or difficult) to be executed when the variation time of the symbol is longer than when the variation time is short. In addition, the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is selected according to the symbol variation time, and when the symbol variation time is long, the effect based on the second effect pattern is selected (at a rate of 100%). If the symbol variation time is short, an effect based on the first effect pattern may be selected (at a rate of 100%).

(Configuration 10)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect is configured to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and to perform the special game determination and to stop the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a confirmed effect that suggests that the special game is executed, and it is possible to execute a first notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination. The second notice effect different from the first notice effect can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, and the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. During the first notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first notice effect. During the confirmed effect, the sound output before the execution of the confirmed effect is reproduced. The output is stopped, and the first notice effect may be executed together with the second notice effect, and the final effect is not executed together with the second notice effect.

  According to this configuration 10, since the first notice effect may be executed in combination with the second notice effect or may not be executed in combination with the second notice effect, the notice effect can be varied. On the other hand, for the confirmed effect, the player who is not executed in combination with the second notice effect can be concentrated on the confirmed effect. By stopping BGM in the confirmed effect, it is possible to concentrate on the confirmed effect. The effect control means may be capable of executing the first notice effect and the confirmed effect in one change of the symbol, and may execute the first notice effect and the confirmed effect in the change of one symbol. In the case of executing, the sound reproduction process that has been output before the execution of the first notice effect can be continued during the first notice effect, and the sound is output before the decision effect is executed during the confirmed effect. You may stop the output of the sound.

(Configuration 11)
In the gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect, when the start condition is satisfied, the special game is determined by determining the special game whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player, and stopping after changing the symbol. It comprises a symbol control means for informing the determination result, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination. In this case, a finalized effect suggesting that the special game is executed can be executed, and output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. It is possible to execute a first confirmed effect performed using the effect means and a second confirmed effect performed using a second predetermined number of effect means different from the first predetermined number, and during the first confirmed effect Is And can continue the playback processing of the sound that has been output from the previous execution of the first deterministic effect, the second in definite effect stops the output of the second definite effect sound that has been output before execution.

  According to this configuration 11, the first predetermined effect is effected using a first predetermined number of effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 5 and the frame lamp 37), and the second determined effect is different from the first predetermined effect. An effect can be performed using a second predetermined number of effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 5, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the movable accessory 7). For example, the second predetermined number may be larger than the first predetermined number. In the first finalized production, there are not many flashy productions using relatively few production means, and BGM does not stop. Therefore, a game where the player who does not know the gaming machine has a slightly higher expectation and knows the gaming machine. For those who are convinced of the jackpot, expectations can be raised at once. In the second finalized effect, the BGM is stopped and a flashy effect is performed using a relatively large number of effect means, so that expectations and satisfaction can be enhanced for all players. Moreover, by stopping BGM, attention can be paid to a flashy production, and interest can be improved. The effect control means can execute the first confirmed effect and the second confirmed effect in one symbol variation, and the first confirmed effect and the second confirmed in one symbol variation. In the case of performing the production, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first confirmed production during the first confirmed production, and the second confirmed production during the second finalized production. The output of the sound that was output before the performance is performed may be stopped.

  Note that in the second confirmed effect, any number of effect means may be used as long as an effect with higher decorativeness than the first confirmed effect is performed. Here, the highly decorative performance is a performance that looks flashy to the player. For example, in the second confirmed effect, the movable accessory 7 operates and an image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. In the first confirmed effect, the movable accessory 7 does not operate and the liquid crystal display device is operated. 5 may display an image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, in the second confirmed effect, a louder sound than when the first confirmed effect is executed may be output, a flashy sound (for example, a high sound) may be output, or a long sound is output. May be. Further, in the second finalized effect, the big win may be confirmed by a plurality of images, whereas in the first finalized effect, the big hit may be suggested by fewer images than the second finalized effect. Further, in the second finalized effect, the big win may be confirmed by a relatively large image, whereas in the first finalized effect, the big hit may be suggested by an image smaller than the second finalized effect. Further, in the second finalized effect, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emit light with various types of colors, while in the first finalized effect, the panel lamps 25 and / or with fewer types of colors than the second finalized effect. Alternatively, the frame lamp 37 may emit light. Further, in the second finalized effect, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emit light relatively brightly, while in the first finalized effect, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits darker than the second finalized effect. May be. In the second finalized effect, the effect button 26 and the effect lever 28 vibrate strongly, while in the first finalized effect, the effect button 26 and the effect lever 28 may vibrate weaker than the second finalized effect.

(Configuration 12)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect determines a special game for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and changes the symbol and then stops the special game. A design control means for informing the result of the determination; an output means for outputting a sound; and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means has a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. (For example, a notice effect or a premier effect) can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, a second effect (for example, an SPSP development effect) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect. , SPSP reach production, jackpot finalizing production) can be executed, and before the first production, the first operation promotion production that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated can be executed. Before executing the second effect, it is possible to execute a second operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated, and to control the output of the sound output from the output means During the first operation promotion effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, and during the second operation promotion effect, the second operation promotion effect. The output of the sound that was output before the execution of the effect is stopped, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to operate in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect is an operation means. Is an effect of prompting an operation in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode.

  According to this configuration 12, the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be performed before the second effect, which is different from the first effect and the first effect. For example, the second stage may have a higher expectation than the first stage. In this case, the second operation promotion effect immediately before the second effect with higher expectation is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, so that the second operation promotion effect is recognized as a special one. , Can increase the expectations of the player. Moreover, since BGM stops during the 2nd operation promotion effect, it can concentrate on operation by a 2nd operation mode. In addition, when the second production has a higher degree of expectation than the first production, the operation according to the second operation mode is less frequent than the operation according to the first operation mode, and the player is confused by the operation. However, by stopping the BGM, the player can be prepared for the operation and the correct operation can be performed.

(Configuration 13)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect is configured to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and to determine whether or not to execute the special game. Based on the result of the determination of the special game, the symbol control means for informing the determination result, the first variation pattern and a second variation pattern different from the first variation pattern as the variation pattern of the symbol A variation pattern determining means for determining any one of a plurality of variation patterns, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, wherein the effect control means is configured to determine the special game. Based on the result, a first effect (for example, a notice effect or a premier effect) can be executed, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed is based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to execute a second effect (for example, SPSP development effect, SPSP reach effect) that is different from the output, and to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the first effect, It is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect is stopped, and the fluctuation When the first variation pattern is determined by the pattern determining means, the second effect can be executed in the first effect mode, and when the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means, The second effect can be executed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.

  According to this configuration 13, the production can be varied by changing the second production depending on the variation pattern. In addition, in both the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, since the BGM continues in the first effect, the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, since the BGM stops for each of the second effects, the player can be thrilled and the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. Even when the timing at which the second effect is started differs due to the difference in the variation pattern, the player's expectation can be increased by stopping the BGM.

  Different characters, items, and characters may be displayed in the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode. In addition, in the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode, images of the same character, item, character, and different colors (or patterns) may be displayed. . Further, the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode may be made different depending on whether or not the effect image is added to the same image. Further, the second effect may be an effect with a higher expectation than the first effect. The second variation pattern may have a variation time longer than that of the first variation pattern.

(Configuration 14)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 14 includes a determination unit that performs a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping the game after changing the symbol. A design control means for informing the result of the determination; an output means for outputting a sound; and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means has a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, a second effect different from the first effect can be executed, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed, and the sound output from the output means It is possible to perform output control, and during the first effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, the second effect. Was output before the execution of Can be continuously output even after execution of the first effect, and after the execution of the second effect, the second effect can be output. It is possible to output a sound different from the sound that was output before the execution of.

  According to this configuration 14, the continuity of effects can be maintained by not changing the type of BGM before and after the execution of the first effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the second effect, the BGM is stopped, and another BGM is output after the execution of the second effect, so that the effect can be switched smoothly. In addition, by stopping the BGM that has been flowing before switching to another BGM, it can be expected to develop into a highly expected production.

  Note that the BGM volume need not be changed before and after the execution of the first effect. Further, the volume of the BGM may be changed before and after the execution of the second effect. For example, the volume of the BGM may be increased after execution of the second effect than before execution of the first effect. Further, the second effect may be an effect suggesting that there is a higher possibility of a special game being performed than the first effect.

(Configuration 15)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 15 includes a determination unit that performs a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping the game after changing the symbol. It comprises a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means can display a background image on the display means. Based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect (for example, a notice effect or a premier effect) can be executed, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed based on the result of the special game determination is A second effect (for example, SPSP development effect) different from the first effect can be executed, and the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. During the first effect, the first effect is performed. Production The reproduction process of the sound output before the execution can be continued, and during the second effect, the output of the sound output before the execution of the second effect is stopped, and the second effect is This is an effect of dark-displaying at least a part of the background image.

  According to this configuration 15, for example, the display screen can be darkened (blacked out) as the second effect and the BGM can be stopped to make it appear that the effect has stopped, and the expectation for the next effect is increased. be able to. The second effect may be an effect suggesting that there is a higher possibility that a special game will be performed than the first effect.

(Configuration 16)
When the start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the sixteenth aspect is configured to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and to perform the special game determination and to stop the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. A design control means for informing the result of the determination; an output means for outputting a sound; and an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means has a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Can be executed, the second effect can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed, and during the first effect The reproduction processing of the first sound output before the execution of the first effect can be continued, and during the second effect, the second sound output before the execution of the second effect is performed. Stop output and start playing the first sound The first effect is started when the first time has elapsed, and the first effect is started when the second time has elapsed from the start of the reproduction of the first sound. When the third time has elapsed from the start of the reproduction of the second sound, the second effect is started.

  According to this configuration 16, the first effect may be started when the first time has elapsed since the start of BGM reproduction, and may be started when the second time has elapsed, while the second effect is Starts when a fixed third time has elapsed since the start of BGM playback. That is, since the first effect is started at a random reproduction position of BGM, the effect can be given unexpectedness. On the other hand, since the second effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in BGM, the player can predict the start timing of the second effect in accordance with the music.

  The third time may vary depending on the symbol variation pattern.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 5 Liquid crystal display device 7 Movable accessory 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Big prize opening 24 Speaker 25 Panel lamp 26 Effect button 28 Effect lever 37 Frame lamp 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd Special design indicator 51 Decorative design 52 Hold display 53 Fluctuating display 55 4th design 60 Premier character 65 Predetermined character 80, 83 Button image 81, 84 Valid period image 101, 131, 141, 151 CPU
130 Production control unit 140 Image sound control unit 150 Lamp control unit

Claims (1)

A determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied;
A symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by stopping after changing the symbol;
Output means for outputting sound;
Production control means for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Based on the result of the special game determination, the first effect can be executed,
Based on the result of the special game determination, the second effect can be executed,
It is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means,
During the first effect, it is possible to continue the playback process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect. A gaming machine that stops output.

Images